Canon Printer 2160B002 User Manual

iPF710  
SERVICE  
MANUAL  
DU7-1244-000  
OCTOBER 2007  
REV. 0  
COPYRIGHT ©2007 CANON INC.  
CANON imagePROGRAF 710 REV. 0 PRINTED IN U.S.A.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Symbols Used  
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:  
Symbol  
Description  
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or  
Warning.  
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.  
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).  
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.  
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.  
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in  
question.  
Memo  
REF.  
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.  
Provides a description of a service mode.  
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:  
1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between elec-  
trical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.  
In the diagrams,  
symbol, the arrow  
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the  
indicates the direction of the electric signal.  
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing  
the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power.  
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used  
to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as  
in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'.  
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field.  
Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained  
in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB  
to the loads.  
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other  
purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.  
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all  
relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Contents  
1.1 Product Overview.............................................................................................. 1-1  
1.1.1 Product Overview....................................................................................................... 1-1  
1.2 Features.............................................................................................................. 1-2  
1.2.1 Features....................................................................................................................... 1-2  
1.2.2 Printhead ..................................................................................................................... 1-2  
1.2.3 Ink Tank....................................................................................................................... 1-3  
1.2.4 Cutter unit.................................................................................................................... 1-3  
1.2.5 Roll Holder................................................................................................................... 1-3  
1.2.6 Stand............................................................................................................................ 1-4  
1.2.7 IEEE1394 (FireWire) Board...................................................................................... 1-5  
1.2.8 Consumables.............................................................................................................. 1-5  
1.3 Product Specifications...................................................................................... 1-7  
1.3.1 Product Specifications............................................................................................... 1-7  
1.4 Detailed Specifications................................................................................... 1-10  
1.4.1 Print Speed and Direction....................................................................................... 1-10  
1.4.2 Interface specifications............................................................................................ 1-17  
1.5 Names and Functions of Components ........................................................ 1-18  
1.5.1 Front........................................................................................................................... 1-18  
1.5.2 Rear............................................................................................................................ 1-19  
1.5.3 Carriage..................................................................................................................... 1-20  
1.6 Basic Operation............................................................................................... 1-21  
1.6.1 Operation Panel ....................................................................................................... 1-21  
1.6.2 Main Menu................................................................................................................. 1-22  
1.7 Safety and Precautions.................................................................................. 1-40  
1.7.1 Safety Precautions ...................................................................................................1-40  
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts ....................................................................................................................... 1-40  
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink................................................................................................................... 1-41  
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts....................................................................................................................... 1-42  
1.7.2 Other Precautions ....................................................................................................1-44  
1.7.2.1 Printhead.............................................................................................................................. 1-44  
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank ............................................................................................................................... 1-45  
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ........................................................................................................... 1-46  
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer .....................................................................1-48  
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer.......................................................................... 1-48  
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version .................................................................................... 1-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity.............................................................................. 1-48  
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly..................................................................... 1-49  
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature ..................................................................................................... 1-49  
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery...................................................................................... 1-49  
2.1 Basic Operation Outline.................................................................................... 2-1  
2.1.1 Printer Diagram ......................................................................................................... 2-1  
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence.............................................................................................. 2-2  
2.1.3 Print Driving................................................................................................................ 2-3  
2.2 Firmware ............................................................................................................. 2-6  
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on.......................................................................... 2-6  
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off.......................................................................... 2-7  
2.2.3 Print Control ............................................................................................................... 2-8  
2.2.4 Print Position Adjustment Function ...................................................................... 2-14  
2.2.5 Head Management ................................................................................................. 2-14  
2.2.6 Printhead Overheating Protection Control .......................................................... 2-14  
2.2.7 Pause between Pages ........................................................................................... 2-15  
2.2.8 White Raster Skip ................................................................................................... 2-15  
2.2.9 Sleep Mode.............................................................................................................. 2-15  
2.3 Printer Mechanical System............................................................................. 2-16  
2.3.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................... 2-16  
2.3.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................. 2-16  
2.3.2 Ink Passage ............................................................................................................. 2-17  
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage ........................................................................................................................ 2-17  
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit....................................................................................................................... 2-19  
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit....................................................................................................................... 2-22  
2.3.2.4 Printhead ............................................................................................................................. 2-25  
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit ........................................................................................................................... 2-26  
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge...................................................................................................... 2-32  
2.3.2.7 Air Flow................................................................................................................................ 2-33  
2.3.3 Paper Path ............................................................................................................... 2-33  
2.3.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................. 2-33  
2.3.3.2 Paper Path .......................................................................................................................... 2-35  
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit ........................................................................................................................... 2-36  
2.4 Printer Electrical System................................................................................. 2-37  
2.4.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................... 2-37  
2.4.1.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 2-37  
2.4.2 Main Controller ........................................................................................................ 2-39  
2.4.2.1 Main controller components ............................................................................................. 2-39  
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB ............................................................................................... 2-41  
2.4.3.1 Carriage relay PCB components..................................................................................... 2-41  
2.4.4 Head Relay PCB ..................................................................................................... 2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
2.4.4.1 Head relay PCB components........................................................................................... 2-41  
2.4.5 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB .......................................................................2-42  
2.4.5.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components............................................................. 2-42  
2.4.6 Power Supply ............................................................................................................2-42  
2.4.6.1 Power supply block diagram............................................................................................. 2-42  
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors................................................................ 2-43  
2.5.1 Sensors for covers................................................................................................... 2-43  
2.5.2 Ink passage system................................................................................................. 2-44  
2.5.3 Carriage system ....................................................................................................... 2-47  
2.5.4 Paper path system................................................................................................... 2-49  
3.1 Transporting the Printer ................................................................................... 3-1  
3.1.1 Transporting the Printer ............................................................................................3-1  
3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer....................................................................................................... 3-1  
3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer ..............................................................................................3-4  
3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer ........................................................................................................ 3-4  
4.1 Service Parts...................................................................................................... 4-1  
4.1.1 Service Parts............................................................................................................... 4-1  
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly................................................................................ 4-1  
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly......................................................................................... 4-1  
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly........................................ 4-3  
4.3.1 Note on locations prohibited from disassembly .................................................... 4-3  
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually.................................................................................. 4-3  
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink................................................................................... 4-3  
4.3.4 External Covers.......................................................................................................... 4-4  
4.3.5 Waste Ink Box........................................................................................................... 4-11  
4.3.6 Driving Unit................................................................................................................ 4-12  
4.3.7 Ink Tube Unit............................................................................................................. 4-13  
4.3.8 Carriage Unit............................................................................................................. 4-16  
4.3.9 Feeder Unit ............................................................................................................... 4-21  
4.3.10 Purge Unit ............................................................................................................... 4-22  
4.3.11 Ink Tank Unit........................................................................................................... 4-23  
4.3.12 Head Management Sensor................................................................................... 4-25  
4.3.13 Multi Sensor............................................................................................................ 4-26  
4.3.14 PCBs........................................................................................................................ 4-27  
4.3.15 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit............................................................ 4-28  
4.3.16 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve............................................................... 4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4.3.17 Draining the Ink ..................................................................................................... 4-30  
4.4 Applying the Grease........................................................................................ 4-31  
4.4.1 Applying the Grease ............................................................................................... 4-31  
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items.......................................................................... 4-33  
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List ............................................................................................... 4-33  
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor.......................... 4-33  
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor ............................. 4-34  
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts............................................................................. 5-1  
5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts.................................................................................... 5-1  
5.2 Consumable Parts ............................................................................................. 5-1  
5.2.1 Consumable Parts..................................................................................................... 5-1  
5.3 Periodic Maintenance........................................................................................ 5-2  
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance............................................................................................... 5-2  
6.1 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 6-1  
6.1.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................... 6-1  
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 6-1  
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement.............................................. 6-2  
6.2.1 Main controller PCB.................................................................................................. 6-2  
6.2.2 Carriage relay PCB................................................................................................. 6-12  
6.2.3 Head relay PCB....................................................................................................... 6-19  
6.3 Version Up ........................................................................................................ 6-24  
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................ 6-24  
6.4 Service Tools.................................................................................................... 6-25  
6.4.1 Tool List .................................................................................................................... 6-25  
6.4.2 Using the Cover Switch Tool................................................................................. 6-26  
7.1 Service Mode...................................................................................................... 7-1  
7.1.1 Service Mode Operation .......................................................................................... 7-1  
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode......................................................................................... 7-2  
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode ......................................................................................... 7-10  
7.1.4 Sample Printout....................................................................................................... 7-27  
7.2 Special Mode.................................................................................................... 7-32  
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing.................................................................................. 7-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8.1 Outline................................................................................................................. 8-1  
8.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................... 8-1  
8.2 Warning Table ................................................................................................... 8-2  
8.2.1 Warnings ..................................................................................................................... 8-2  
8.3 Error Table ......................................................................................................... 8-3  
8.3.1 Error Code List ........................................................................................................... 8-3  
8.4 Sevice Call Table .............................................................................................. 8-6  
8.4.1 Service call errors ...................................................................................................... 8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Contents  
1.1 Product Overview.............................................................................................. 1-1  
1.1.1 Product Overview....................................................................................................... 1-1  
1.2 Features.............................................................................................................. 1-2  
1.2.1 Features....................................................................................................................... 1-2  
1.2.2 Printhead ..................................................................................................................... 1-2  
1.2.3 Ink Tank....................................................................................................................... 1-3  
1.2.4 Cutter unit.................................................................................................................... 1-3  
1.2.5 Roll Holder................................................................................................................... 1-3  
1.2.6 Stand............................................................................................................................ 1-4  
1.2.7 IEEE1394 (FireWire) Board...................................................................................... 1-5  
1.2.8 Consumables.............................................................................................................. 1-5  
1.3 Product Specifications...................................................................................... 1-7  
1.3.1 Product Specifications............................................................................................... 1-7  
1.4 Detailed Specifications................................................................................... 1-10  
1.4.1 Print Speed and Direction....................................................................................... 1-10  
1.4.2 Interface specifications............................................................................................ 1-17  
1.5 Names and Functions of Components ........................................................ 1-18  
1.5.1 Front........................................................................................................................... 1-18  
1.5.2 Rear............................................................................................................................ 1-19  
1.5.3 Carriage..................................................................................................................... 1-20  
1.6 Basic Operation............................................................................................... 1-21  
1.6.1 Operation Panel ....................................................................................................... 1-21  
1.6.2 Main Menu................................................................................................................. 1-22  
1.7 Safety and Precautions.................................................................................. 1-40  
1.7.1 Safety Precautions ...................................................................................................1-40  
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts ....................................................................................................................... 1-40  
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink................................................................................................................... 1-41  
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts....................................................................................................................... 1-42  
1.7.2 Other Precautions ....................................................................................................1-44  
1.7.2.1 Printhead.............................................................................................................................. 1-44  
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank ............................................................................................................................... 1-45  
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer ........................................................................................................... 1-46  
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer .....................................................................1-48  
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer.......................................................................... 1-48  
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version .................................................................................... 1-48  
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity .............................................................................. 1-48  
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly..................................................................... 1-49  
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature ..................................................................................................... 1-49  
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery...................................................................................... 1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
1.1 Product Overview  
1.1.1 Product Overview  
0012-6185  
This printer is a large-format printer that prints in a maximum width of 36 inches with high-speed photographic  
picture quality.  
This printer is a desktop product that delivers its output on roll media or cut sheets.  
[1]  
[2]  
[7]  
[8]  
[9]  
[5]  
[10]  
[3]  
[6]  
[4]  
[11]  
[12]  
[13]  
[14]  
[15]  
F-1-1  
T-1-1  
[1] Top Cover  
[9] USB Port  
[2] Upper Left Cover  
[3] Stand (option)  
[10] Power Supply Connector  
[11] Roll Holder Set  
[12] Printhead  
[4] Output Stacker (included with stand)  
[5] Operation Panel  
[13] Ink Tank  
[6] Ink Tank Cover  
[14] Power Cord  
[7] Expansion Board Slot  
[8] Ethernet Connector  
[15] Cleaner Brush  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
1.2 Features  
1.2.1 Features  
0012-6186  
-Rear loading of roll media, making for compact, lightweight device geometry.  
-Borderless four-side printing support (roll media) removes laborious cutting work, easing the job of creating  
posters to a significant degree.  
-High resolutions of 2400 x 1200 dpi maximum, coupled with the exceptionally light-fast, water-proof and  
ozone-proof five-color pigment inks of Y, M, C, BK and MBK, deliver high-quality photographic picture  
quality.  
-High-speed printing under bidirectional print control.  
-Ink supply through tubing to a completely independent printhead and large-capacity ink tanks.  
-Ready for roll media and cut media.  
-Roll media pass in widths between 254 and 914.4 mm and in lengths up to 18 m.  
-The cutter unit that mounts on the carriage allows paper to be cut automatically.  
-Cut media are fed and ejected and ink tanks replaced all in an easy-to-access front panel operation.  
-USB2.0 high-speed interface and 10Base-T/100Base-TX in standard support of a TCP/IP network, plus  
optional support of IEEE1394.  
1.2.2 Printhead  
0013-2741  
The printhead that mounts on the carriage is an integrated six-color disposable printhead.  
It has 5,120 nozzles for MBK and 2,560 nozzles for each additional color arranged in a zigzag pattern.  
If print quality remains unimproved even after a specified cleaning operation, replace the printhead.  
Replacement about one year after the date of initial unpacking is also recommended.  
F-1-2  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 1  
1.2.3 Ink Tank  
0013-0607  
Ink tanks are disposable.  
An ink tank should be replaced when an ink tank replacement prompt message appears or when six months  
expire after the date of initial unpacking, whichever occurs earlier.  
To install ink tanks, open the right cover of the printer. Ink tanks are furnished with a notch for preventing  
incorrect installation, which will allow the tanks to be installed at the position marked in the right color and  
nowhere else.  
Ink tanks are available in the four dye ink colors of black, cyan, magenta and yellow and the pigment ink color  
of mat black.  
F-1-3  
1.2.4 Cutter unit  
0013-5146  
The cutter unit that mounts on the carriage is disposable.  
Replace the cutter unit when it gets dull.  
F-1-4  
1.2.5 Roll Holder  
0017-4103  
The printer comes with a roll holder for 2-inch paper tube and 3-inch paper tube attachment.  
The roll holder clamps the paper tubes of roll media with an outside diameter of 150 mm or less from inside.  
F-1-5  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 1  
1.2.6 Stand  
0016-4115  
It is a stand that puts the printer. Equipped with casters so that the printer can be easily moved. The output  
stacker included with stand can use by the two ways of the regular position or extended position.  
F-1-6  
MEMO:  
- Use the output stacker in the regular position [A]. However, for the specified media, it can also be used in the  
extended position [B]. The media can be removed more easily when the output stacker is in the extended  
position.  
- The output stacker can accommodate one sheet. Remove each sheet before printing if you are printing a series  
of documents.  
[A]  
[B]  
F-1-7  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
1.2.7 IEEE1394 (FireWire) Board  
0016-8123  
IEEE1394 (FireWire) expansion board (option)  
An interface board that provides an additional IEEE1394 (FireWire) port.  
F-1-8  
1.2.8 Consumables  
0013-2743  
a. Printhead  
The expendable printhead is the same as the one that comes with the printer.  
F-1-9  
b. Ink Tanks  
The expendable ink tanks are available in five colors: mat black, black, cyan, magenta and yellow. They are  
the same the same as the ones that come with the printer. Usable for six months after unpacking.  
The ink tank that can be used with this printer is labeled "A".  
F-1-10  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
c. Maintenance cartridge  
The expendable maintenance cartridge is the same as the one that comes with the printer.  
The maintenance cartridge is furnished with a shaft cleaner.  
F-1-11  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
1.3 Product Specifications  
1.3.1 Product Specifications  
0017-4110  
Type  
Bubble-jet printer (desktop type)  
Feeding system  
Roll media: Manual (Rear loading)  
Cut media: Paper tray (Front loading)  
Feeding capacity  
Delivery method  
Roll media: 1 roll (up to 150mm in outside diameter)/Inner  
diameter of paper tube: 2 or 3 inches  
Cut media: 1 sheet  
Delivers the media with its printed side up in the forward  
direction.  
Sheet delivery capability  
Cutter  
1 sheet (collected in a output stacker)  
[CT-05] Auto-cutter with replaceable cartridges  
Type of media  
Plain Paper, Plain Paper(High Quality), Plain Paper(High  
Grade), All Plain Paper_Conserve MBK, Coated Paper,  
Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper, Glossy  
Photo Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, Recycled Coated  
Paper, Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Heavyweight Glossy  
Photo Paper 2, Heavywght SemiGlos Photo Paper 2, Satin  
Photographic Paper 190gsm, Synthetic Paper, Adhesive  
Synthetic Paper, Proofing Paper, Colored Coated Paper, CAD  
Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, CAD Clear Film,  
Newsprint for Proofing1, Newsprint for Proofing2, Economy  
Bond Paper, Universal Bond Paper, Premium Coated Paper,  
Matte Coated Paper 90gsm, Glossy Photographic Paper  
190gsm, Glossy Photographic Paper 240gsm, Satin  
Photographic Paper 240gsm, HW Glossy Photo Paper, HW  
Satin Photo Paper, Premium RC Photo Luster, Commercial  
Proofing Paper, Commercial RC Proofing 210gsm,  
Commercial RC Proofing 270gsm  
Supported thickness  
0.07mm to 0.8mm  
Media size (Roll media)  
Width: 254mm to 914.4mm  
Length: 203.2mm to 18m (Roll media up to 150 mm in outside  
diameter)  
Media size (Cut sheet)  
Width: 203.2mm to 917mm  
Length: 203.2mm to 1600mm  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
Printable area (Roll media) Bordered printing: Internal area, excluding 3mm top, bottom,  
and left and right margins.  
Borderless printing: Internal area, excluding 0mm top, bottom,  
and left and right margins.  
* The printable area may vary with each type of paper media  
used.  
Width of media allowing borderless printing:  
36"(914mm), A0(841mm), B1(728mm), 24"(610mm),  
A1(594mm), B2(515mm), 16"(407mm), 14"(356mm),  
10"(524mm)  
Media type allowing borderless printing:  
Heavyweight Coated Paper, Premium Matte Paper, Glossy  
Photo Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, Extra Heavyweight  
Coated Paper, Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper 2, Heavywght  
SemiGlos Photo Paper 2, Satin Photographic Paper 190gsm,  
Premium Coated Paper, Glossy Photographic Paper 190gsm,  
Glossy Photographic Paper 240gsm, Satin Photographic Paper  
240gsm, HW Glossy Photo Paper, HW Satin Photo Paper,  
Premium RC Photo Luster  
Printable area (Cut sheet)  
Internal area, excluding a 3mm top margin, 23mm bottom  
margin and 3mm left and right margins.  
*1 Borderless printing does not support cut media as yet.  
*2 The printable area may vary with each type of paper media  
used.  
Printing recommendation  
area (Roll media)  
Internal area, excluding a 20mm top margin, 5mm bottom  
margin, and 5mm left and right margins.  
Printing recommendation  
area (Cut sheet)  
Internal area, excluding a 20mm top margin, 23mm bottom  
margin, and 5mm left and right margins.  
Margins (Roll media)  
Roll media: 3mm for top, bottom and left and right margins  
Borderless roll media: 0mm for top, bottom and left and right  
margins  
Margins (Cut sheet)  
3mm top margin, 23mm bottom margin and 3mm left and right  
margins  
* Borderless printing does not support cut media as yet.  
Memory  
256MB  
Increase of memory: none  
Firmware  
Flash ROM (update from USB or Ethernet, IEEE1394)  
- Printer description language  
GARO (Graphic Arts language with Raster Operation), HP-  
GL/2, HP RTL  
Emulation  
Interface  
Not available.  
USB2.0, Ethernet, IEEE1394 (option)  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Operation panel  
LCD (160 X 128 dots), 12 keys, 5 LEDs  
- Panel language  
English  
- Message language  
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Chinese, Korean,  
Russianand and Japanese  
Printhead/Ink Tank type  
Printhead  
Printhead and separate ink tanks  
[PF-03] Number nozzles: 2560 nozzles per color  
Ink tank  
[PFI-102] MBK, BK, C, M, Y  
Capacity: 130ml per color (Ink tanks supplied with the printer  
contain 90ml of each color.)  
Detection functions (Cover Head cap position sensor: Yes/ Cover open/closed sensor: Yes  
system)  
Detection functions (Ink  
passage system)  
Ink tank sensor: Yes/Remaining ink level sensor: Yes/  
Maintenance cartridge sensor: Yes/Used ink tank full sensor:  
Yes/Printhead sensor: Yes  
Detection functions  
(Carriage system)  
Paper slip sensor: Yes/Carriage position sensor: Yes/Carriage  
home position sensor: Yes/Carriage cover open/closed sensor:  
Yes/Carriage temperature sensor: Yes  
Detection functions (Paper Paper sensor: Yes/Leading and trailing paper end sensors: Yes/  
path system)  
Paper width sensor: Yes/Slant sensor: Yes/Paper release lever  
position sensor: Yes/Roll media bottom sensor: Yes/  
Remaining roll media sensor: Yes/Feed roller rotation sensor:  
Yes  
Operating noise  
Sound pressure level: 54dB (A) or less, operating; 35dB or less,  
idle  
Acoustic power level: 6.8 Bels  
Operating environment  
Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade  
Humidity: 10% to 80% without dew condensation  
Print quality guaranteed  
environment  
Temperature: 15 to 30 degrees centigrade  
Humidity: 10% to 80%RH  
Power supply  
100-240VAC (50/60Hz)  
140W or less  
Power consumption  
(Maximum)  
Power consumption  
When idle in energy save mode (sleep mode)  
100-120V: 5W or less (When IEEE1394 board installed, 10W  
or less)  
220-240V: 6W or less (When IEEE1394 board installed, 11W  
or less)  
When switched off (idle):  
1W or less  
Printer unit dimensions  
(WxDxH)  
1507mm(width)  
(including the stand)  
Approx. 64kg (including the stand)  
x
871mm(depth)  
x
1094mm(height)  
Weight  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
1.4 Detailed Specifications  
1.4.1 Print Speed and Direction  
0017-4241  
T-1-2  
Print  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
Used  
BK ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Plain  
Paper/  
Recycled  
Paper  
Plain Paper  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
Plain Paper  
(High Quality)  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
Plain Paper  
(High Grade)  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
All Plain  
Paper_Conser  
ve MBK  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
Print  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
Used  
BK ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Economy  
Bond Paper  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
Plain  
Paper/  
Recycled  
Paper  
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
Universal  
Bond Paper  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
Standard  
Paper 1569B  
80g  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
Standard  
Paper 1570B  
90g  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Print  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
Used  
BK ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Coated  
Paper  
Coated Paper Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
BK  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
Heavyweight Line Document/  
Coated Paper Text  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
Extra  
Line Document/  
Heavyweight Text  
Coated Paper  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
Recycled  
Line Document/  
Coated Paper Text  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
Premium  
Matte Paper  
Line Document/  
Text  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Image  
Standard  
High  
6
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
4
Colored  
Coated Paper  
8
BK  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Print  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
Used  
BK ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Coated  
Paper  
Premium  
Coated Paper Text  
Line Document/  
Draft  
1
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
BK  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
LightWeight Line Document/  
Coated Paper Text  
J80270 90g  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
High  
Line Document/  
Text  
Resolution  
Barrier Paper  
180g  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
Matt Coated  
Paper 9171  
120g  
Line Document/  
Text  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
Extra Matt  
Coated Paper Text  
7215 180g  
Line Document/  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
12  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Print  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
Used  
BK ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Coated  
Paper  
Opaque Paper Line Document/  
Draft  
1
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
BK  
White 120g  
Text  
1
BK  
Standard  
High  
2
BK  
4
BK  
4
BK  
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
BK  
8
BK  
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
BK  
Matt Coated  
Paper 140g  
Line Document/  
Text  
BK  
1
BK  
Standard  
High  
2
BK  
4
BK  
4
BK  
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
BK  
8
BK  
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
BK  
Photo  
Line Document/  
BK  
RealisticPaper Text  
210g  
1
BK  
Standard  
High  
2
BK  
4
BK  
4
BK  
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
BK  
8
BK  
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
BK  
LightWeight Line Document/  
Coated Paper Text  
BK  
1
BK  
Standard  
High  
2
BK  
4
BK  
4
BK  
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
BK  
8
BK  
Highest  
Standard  
High  
12  
6
BK  
Photo  
Paper  
Glossy Photo Image  
Paper  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Semi-Glossy Image  
Photo Paper  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Heavyweight Image  
Glossy Photo  
Paper 2  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Heavywght  
SemiGlos  
Image  
8
Photo Paper 2  
Highest  
16  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Print  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
Used  
BK ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Image  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Photo  
Paper  
Satin  
Standard  
High  
6
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
BK  
Photographic  
Paper 190gsm  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Premium RC Image  
Photo Luster ,  
10 mil  
8
BK  
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
BK  
Instant Dry  
Papers Glossy  
200g  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
BK  
8
BK  
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
BK  
Instant Dry  
Papers Satin  
200g  
BK  
8
BK  
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
BK  
Photo Paper  
High Glossy  
250g  
BK  
8
BK  
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
BK  
Photo Paper  
Semi Matt  
250g  
BK  
8
BK  
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
BK  
Photo Paper  
Satin 240g  
BK  
8
BK  
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
BK  
Photo Paper  
Pearl 260g  
BK  
8
BK  
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
BK  
Proofing  
Paper  
Proofing Paper Image  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
BK  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Professional  
Proof and  
Photo Glossy  
195g  
Image  
Image  
8
BK  
Highest  
16  
BK  
Professional  
Proof and  
Photo  
Semiglossy  
195g  
Standard  
High  
6
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
BK  
BK  
BK  
8
Highest  
16  
Professional  
Proof and  
Photo  
Semigloss  
255g  
Image  
Standard  
High  
6
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
BK  
BK  
BK  
8
Highest  
16  
Synthetic Synthetic  
Image  
Image  
Standard  
High  
6
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
Paper  
Paper  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Adhesive  
Synthetic  
Paper  
8
Highest  
16  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Print  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
Used  
BK ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Image  
Adhesive High  
Matt Paper Resolution  
Graphic Paper  
Standard  
High  
6
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
BK  
BK  
BK  
8
Highest  
16  
Self ADH  
CAD  
CAD Tracing Line Document/  
Draft  
1
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
1200x1200  
2400x1200  
2400x1200  
BK  
Paper  
Text  
1
BK  
Standard  
High  
2
BK  
4
BK  
4
BK  
CAD  
Translucent  
Matte Film  
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
BK  
1
BK  
Standard  
High  
2
BK  
4
BK  
4
BK  
CAD  
Translucent  
Matte Film  
Line Document/  
Text  
Standard  
High  
2
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
MBK  
4
4
Highest  
8
8
Special  
Special 1  
Special 2  
Special 3  
Special 4  
Special 5  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Standard  
High  
6
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
8
Highest  
16  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
1.4.2 Interface specifications  
0013-4625  
a. [USB] (Standard)  
(1) Interface Type  
USB 2.0, full speed (12 Mbits/sec), high Speed (480 Mbits/sec)  
(2) Methods of data transfer  
Controlled transfer  
Bulk transfer  
(3) Signal level  
Compliant with the USB standard.  
(4) Interface cable  
Twisted-pair shielded cable, 5.0 m or shorter  
Compliant with the USB standard.  
Wire AWG No.28, data line pair (AWG: American Wire Gauge)  
AWG No.20 to No.28, distribution line pair  
(5) Interface connector  
Printer side: USB standard, Series B receptacle  
Cable side: USB standard, Series B plug  
b. [Network] (Standard)  
(1) Interface Type  
IEEE802.3-compliant interface  
(2) Data transfer method  
10Base-T/100Base-TX  
(3) Signal level  
Input: Threshold.  
10Base-T: Max +585mV, min +300mV  
100Base-TX: Turn-on +1000mV diff pk-pk, turn-off +200mV diff pk-pk  
Output:  
10Base-T: +2.2V - + 2.8V  
100Base-TX: +0.95V - +1.05V  
(4) Interface cable  
Category 5 (UTP or FTP) cable, 100 m or shorter  
Compliant with the ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A or ANSI/EIA/TIA-568B standard.  
(5) Interface connector  
Printer side: IEEE802.3 and ANSI X3.263-compliant, ISO/IEC60603-7 standard  
c. [IEEE1394] (option)  
(1) Interface Type  
IEEE1394-1995, P1394a (Version 2.0)-compliant interface  
(2) Method of data transfer  
Asynchronous transfer  
(3) Signal levels  
Input:  
Differential input voltage: +173mV - +260mV during S100 arbitration  
+142mV - +260mV, receiving data  
+171mV - +262mV during S200 arbitration  
+132mV - +260mV, receiving data  
+168mV - +265mV during S400 arbitration  
+118mV - +260mV, receiving data  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
Output :  
Differential output voltage: +172mV - +265mV  
(4) Interface cable  
Twisted-pair shielded cable, 4.5 mm or shorter.  
Compliant with the IEEE1394-1995 or (Version 2.0) standard  
(5) Interface connector  
Printer side: IEEE1394-compliant, 6-pin connector (socket)  
Cable side: IEEE1394-compliant, 6-pin connector (plug)  
Cable side: Compliant with the ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A or ANSI/EIA/TIA-568B standard, Type RJ-45.  
1.5 Names and Functions of Components  
1.5.1 Front  
0012-6202  
[2]  
[1]  
[3]  
[5]  
[4]  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
F-1-12  
[1] Top cover  
Open this cover when installing the printhead, load media and clear jams inside the printer.  
[2] Eject guide  
Supports ejected media to keep it from floating up.  
[3] Maintenance cartridge  
Blots excess inks.  
[4] Maintenance cartridge cover  
Open this cover to replace the maintenance cartridge.  
[5] Operation panel  
Operate the printer or check its status from this panel.  
[6] Ink tank cover  
Open this cover to replace ink tanks.  
[7] Stand (option)  
It is a stand that puts the printer.  
[8] Output stacker (included with stand)  
It is a stacker made of the cloth that stacks the ejected media.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
1.5.2 Rear  
0013-4638  
[2]  
[4]  
[5]  
[6]  
[1]  
[3]  
F-1-13  
[1] Release lever  
Releases the paper retainer. Press this lever rearward to load paper or clean the interiors of the  
printer.  
[2] Power connector  
Connect the power cord to this connector.  
[3] Roller holder slot  
Set the roll holder in this guide slot.  
[4] Expansion PCB slot  
Mount an IEEE1394 (Fire Wire) expansion PCB on his slot.  
[5] USB port  
Connect the USB cable to this port. Ready for the USB2.0 hi-speed mode.  
[6] Ethernet connector  
Connect the Ethernet cable to this connector.  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
1.5.3 Carriage  
0013-4655  
[2]  
[3]  
[1]  
[6]  
[7]  
[4]  
[5]  
F-1-14  
[1] Carriage cover  
Protects the carriage.  
[2] Printhead fixer cover  
Clamps the printhead.  
[3] Printhead  
A key component that houses nozzles.  
[4] Shaft cleaner  
Keeps the carriage shaft clean.  
[5] Printhead fixer lever  
Locks the printhead fixer cover.  
[6] Slant adjustment lever  
Fine-adjusts slants in ruled lines during printing.  
[7] Cutter unit  
A curved cutting edge that cuts paper automatically. It is tucked inside when cutting is not  
performed.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
1.6 Basic Operation  
1.6.1 Operation Panel  
0012-6207  
The functions of the keys and meanings of LED indications on the operation panel are described below.  
[3]  
[2]  
[1]  
[14]  
Data  
Message  
Online  
Menu  
Power  
Stop  
Infomation  
[4]  
[5]  
[13]  
[12]  
Cleaning  
(3 Sec.)  
OK  
Eject  
[a] [b]  
[6]  
[7]  
[8]  
[9]  
[10]  
[11]  
F-1-15  
[1] Display  
Displays the printer menu, status or messages.  
[2] Data lamp (green)  
"Blinking" The printer is receiving or processing a print job when it is printing.  
The printer has suspended a print job or is receiving firmware data when it is not printing.  
"Off" No print job is available.  
[3] Message lamp (orange)  
"Lit continuously" A warning message is on display.  
"Blinking" An error message is on display.  
"Off" The printer is normal or is powered off.  
[4] Online key  
Switches the printer between two alternative modes: online and offline.  
"Lit continuously" The printer is in online mode. Lights green.  
"Off" The printer is in offline mode.  
[5] Menu key  
Displays a printer main menu.  
[6] Paper source selector  
[a] Roll media lamp (green)  
"Lit continuously" Roll media have been selected as a paper source.  
"Off" Cut media have been selected as a paper source.  
[b] Cut media lamp (green)  
"Lit continuously" Cut media have been selected as a paper source.  
"Off" Roll media have been selected as a paper source.  
[7] Paper source selector key  
Toggles a paper source between roll and cut media each time the key is pressed.  
[8] Color labels  
Colors and names of ink tanks associated with the remaining ink levels appearing on the display.  
[9]  
Keys  
[Menu mode]  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
"
"
"
"
key" Displays the previous action or setting.  
key" Displays the next action or setting.  
key" Opens the menu one level above.  
key" Opens the menu one level lower.  
[Offline mode]  
"
key" Feeds roll media manually in the direction opposite to the direction in which paper is  
ejected.  
"
key" Feeds roll media manually.  
[10] OK key  
Sets or runs a selected action or value when the printer is in menu mode.  
[11] eject key  
Executing menu and ejects paper.  
[12] Stop key  
Quits a processing job.  
[13] Power key  
Switches the power to the printer on and off.  
[14] Information key  
Displays a printer submenu. Information about the inks and paper displays each time this key is  
pressed.  
Hold this key for 3 seconds to clean the printhead.  
1.6.2 Main Menu  
0017-5615  
The printer has a Main menu which includes a menu related to maintenance such as adjustment of ink ejection  
position of each nozzle and head cleaning, a menu related to printing settings such as auto cutting and ink drying  
time, and a menu related to parameters such as a message language.  
1. Main menu operations  
a) How to enter the Main menu  
To enter the Main menu, press the [Menu] button on the operation panel.  
b) How to exit the Main menu  
To exit the Main menu, press the [Online] button.  
c) Buttons used with the Main menu  
- Selecting menus and parameters: [ ] or [ ] button  
- Going to the next lower-level menu: [ ] button  
- Going to the next higher-level menu: [ ] button  
- Determining a selected menu or parameter: [OK] button  
2. Main Menu  
The structure of the main menu is as follows. Values at right indicated by an asterisk "*" are the defaults.  
T-1-3  
First Level  
Second Level  
[Roll Media  
Type](*1)  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[Media Menu]  
[HW Glossy Photo](*5)  
[HW SemiGl  
Photo](*5)  
[Syn. Paper](*5)  
[Adh. Syn. Paper](*5)  
[Proofing Paper](*5)  
[News Proof 1](*5)  
[News Proof 2](*5)  
[News Proof 3](*5)  
[Colored Coated](*5)  
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[CAD Trace Paper](*5)  
[CAD Matte Film](*5)  
[CAD Clear Film](*5)  
Special # Here, the  
number is 1 to 5(*5)  
[Chk Remain.Roll] [Off]*  
[On]  
[Roll Length  
Set](*2)  
[### m]  
[### feet](*9)  
[Paper Details]  
(The paper type is [Roll DryingTime]  
[Off]  
displayed here.)  
(*5)  
[30 sec.]  
[1 min.]  
[3 min.]  
[5 min.]  
[10 min.]  
[30 min.]  
[60 min.]  
[Off]  
[Scan Wait Time]  
[1 sec.]  
[3 sec.]  
[5 sec.]  
[7 sec.]  
[9 sec.]  
[Feed Priority]  
[Automatic]*  
[Band Joint]  
[Print Length]  
-0.70 to 0.70  
[Automatic]*  
[Highest]  
[High]  
[Adjust Length]  
[Head Height]  
[Standard]  
[Low]  
[Lowest]  
T-1-4  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[Paper Details]  
(The paper type is  
[Skew Check Lv.] [Standard]*  
displayed here.) (*5)  
[Loose]  
[Off]  
[VacuumStrngth]  
[Automatic]  
[Strongest]  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
[Strong]  
Fifth Level  
[Standard]  
[Weakest]  
[Width Detection] [Off]  
[On]*  
[NearEnd  
[3mm]  
RollMrgn]  
[20mm]  
[Fast]  
[Cut Speed]  
[Standard]  
[Slow]  
[Trim Edge First]  
[Cutting Mode]  
[Automatic]  
[Off]  
[On]  
[Automatic]  
[Eject]  
[Manual]  
[Bordless Margin] [Automatic]  
[Fixed]  
[CutDustReduct.]  
[Off]  
[On]  
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] [3mm]  
[20mm]  
[Return Defaults]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[GL2 Settings]  
[GL2 Replot]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[GL2 BufferClear] [No]  
[Yes]  
[Color Mode]  
[Color]*  
[Monochrome]  
[Draft]  
[Print Quality]  
[Standard]*  
[High]  
[Input Resolution] [600dpi]*  
[300dpi]  
[Media Source]  
[Roll Paper]*  
[Cassette]  
[Manual]  
[Off]  
[Conserve Paper]  
[On]*  
1-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
T-1-5  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[GL2 Settings]  
[End Point Shape]  
[Software]*  
[Rounded]  
[Software]*  
[Smooth]  
[1dot]  
[Smoothing]  
[Line Width]  
[2dot]  
[3dot]  
[4dot]*  
[5dot]  
[6dot]  
[7dot]  
[Adjust Printer]  
[Auto Head Adj.]  
[Standard Adj.]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[No]  
[Advanced Adj.]  
[Auto Print]  
[Yes]  
[Off]  
[On]*  
[Manual Head Adj] [No]  
[Yes]  
[Auto Band Adj.]  
[Standard Adj.]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[Advanced Adj.]  
[Manual Band Adj] [No]  
[Yes]  
[Adjust Length](*3) [No]  
[Yes]  
[Adjust Head Skew] [No]  
[Yes]  
[Interface Setup]  
[EOP Timer]  
[10 sec.]  
[30 sec.]  
[1 min.]  
[2 min.]  
[5 min.]  
[10 min.]*  
[30 min.]  
[60 min.]  
[IP Mode]  
[TCP/IP]  
[Automatic]  
[Manual]*  
[DHCP]  
[Protocol](*4)  
[On]  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
[BOOTP]  
[RARP]  
Fifth Level  
[Off]*  
[On]  
[Off]*  
[On]  
[Off]*  
T-1-6  
First Level  
Second Level  
[TCP/IP]  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[Interface Setup]  
[IP Setting]  
[IP Address]  
0.0.0.0* to  
255.255.255.255  
[Subnet Mask]  
[Default G/W]  
0.0.0.0* to  
255.255.255.255  
0.0.0.0* to  
255.255.255.255  
[NetWare]  
[NetWare]  
[On]  
[Off]*  
[Frame Type](*6)  
[Auto Detect]  
[Ethernet 2]  
[Ethernet 802.2]*  
[Ethernet 802.3]  
[Ethernet SNAP]  
[Print Service](*6) [BinderyPServer]  
[RPrinter]  
[NDSPServer]*  
[NPrinter]  
[AppleTalk]  
[On]  
[Off]*  
[Ethernet Driver]  
[Auto Detect]  
[On]*  
[Off]  
[Comm.Mode](*7) [Half Duplex]*  
[Full Duplex]  
[Ethernet Type](*7) [10 Base-T]*  
[100 Base-TX]  
[Spanning Tree]  
[Not Use]*  
[Use]  
[MAC Address]  
[No]  
[Ext.Interface]  
[Init. Settings]  
[Maint. cart.]  
[IEEE1394]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[Maintenance]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
1-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
[No]  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[Replace P.head]  
[Yes]  
[No]  
[Repl. S. Cleaner]  
[Change Cutter]  
[Move Printer]  
Warning]  
[Yes]  
[No]*  
[Yes]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[Buzzer]  
[System Setup]  
[Off]  
[On]*  
[Detect Mismatch] [Pause]  
[Warning]*  
[None]  
T-1-7  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[System Setup]  
[Keep Media Size] [Off]*  
[On]  
[Paper Size Basis] [Sht Selection 1]  
[ISO A3+]*  
[13"x19"(Super B)]  
[ISO B1]*  
[Sht Selection 2]  
[28"x40"(ANSI F)]  
[Noz. Check Freq.] [Off]  
[1 page]  
[10 pages]  
[Automatic]*  
[Sleep Timer]  
[5 min.]*  
[10 min.]  
[15 min.]  
[20 min.]  
[30 min.]  
[40 min.]  
[50 min.]  
[60 min.]  
[240 min.]  
[Length Unit]  
[Time Zone]  
[meter]*  
[feet/inch]  
[0: London (GMT)]  
[+1: Paris, Rome]  
[+2: Athens, Cairo]  
[+3: Moscow]  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
[+4: Eerenan, Baku]  
[+5: Islamabad]  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[+6: Dacca]  
[+7: Bangkok]  
[+8: Hong Kong]  
[+9: Tokyo, Seoul]  
[+10: Canberra]  
[+11: NewCaledonia]  
[+12: Wellington]  
[-12: Eniwetok]  
[-11: Midway is]  
[-10: Hawaii (AHST)]  
[-9: Alaska (AKST)]  
[-8: Oregon (PST)]  
[-7: Arizona (MST)]  
[-6: Texas (CST)]  
[-5: NewYork (EST)]  
T-1-8  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
[-4: Santiago]  
[-3: Buenos Aires]  
[-2: ]  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[System Setup]  
[Time Zone]  
[-1: Cape Verde]  
[yyyy/mm/dd]*  
[dd/mm/yyyy]  
[mm/dd/yyyy]  
[Date]  
[Date Format]  
[Date & Time]  
[Language]  
[yyyy/mm/dd](*8)  
[hh:mm]  
[Time]  
[Japanese]*  
[Francais]  
[Italiano]  
[Deutsch]  
[Espanol]  
[Pyccknn]  
[Chinese]  
[Korea]  
[Engulish]  
-4 to 4  
[Contrast Adj.]  
[Reset PaprSetngs] [No]  
[Yes]  
1-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
First Level  
[Test Print]  
Second Level  
[Status Print]  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[No]  
[Yes]  
[Media Details]  
[Print Job Log]  
[Menu Map]  
[Nozzle Check]  
[Information]]  
[System Info]  
[Error Log]  
[Job Log]  
[########-####]  
(Choose from  
information about the  
latest three print jobs.)  
[Document Name]  
[User Name]  
[Page Count]  
[Job Status]  
[Print Start Time]  
[yyyy/mm/dd  
hh:mm]  
[Print End Time]  
[yyyy/mm/dd  
hh:mm]  
[Print Time]  
[Print Size]  
[xxx sec.]  
[xxxxxxxxsq.mm]  
[Media Type]  
[Interface]  
[Ink Consumed]  
[xx.x ml]  
*1: Displayed if a roll is loaded.  
*2: Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On.  
*3: Displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.  
*4: Displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.  
*5: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Media Guide. The media type setting  
in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel is updated when you install Media  
Configuration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using Media  
Configuration Tool.  
*6: Available only if NetWare is On.  
*7: Available only if Auto Detect is Off.  
*8: Follows the setting in Date Format.  
*9: Not displayed if a roll or a sheet has been fed.  
3. Main menu during printing  
The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
T-1-9  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
[Head Cleaning A]  
[Head Cleaning B]  
-5 to 5  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
[Menu Durng Prtng] [Head Cleaning]  
[Fine Band Adj.]  
[Information]  
[System Info]  
[Error Log]  
[########-####]  
[Job Log]  
(Choose from  
information about the  
latest three print jobs.)  
[Document Name]  
[User Name]  
[Page Count]  
[Job Status]  
[Print Start Time]  
[Print End Time]  
[Print Time]  
[Print Size]  
[Media Type]  
[Interface]  
[Ink Consumed]  
1-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
4. Main Menu Settings  
Main menu items are described in the following tables.  
T-1-10  
Setting Item  
[Paper Cut]  
Description, Instructions  
Displayed if a roll is loaded.  
Choose Yes to cut the roll at the current position. The paper will be fed, if  
necessary, so that the sheet is at least 10 cm (39.4 in.)long after the cut. The paper  
will not be cut if there is not enough paper left to feed the paper this much.  
[Rep. Ink Tank]  
[Head Cleaning]  
When exchanging the ink tank, choose Yes and follow the instructions on the  
screen.  
Specify Printhead cleaning options.  
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign  
substances.  
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved  
by Head Cleaning A .  
[Media Menu]  
[Paper Details]  
Specify the type and size of paper.  
Specify detailed paper-related settings, including the ink drying time and  
borderless printing options.  
[GL2 Settings]  
[Adjust Printer]  
[Interface Setup]  
[Maintenance]  
Make settings for making prints using GL2.  
Adjust the Printhead alignment or amount of feed by printing a test pattern.  
Configure the network settings.  
Replace the Printhead , prepare to transfer the printer, and clean the Pick Up  
Roller .  
[System Setup]  
[Test Print]  
Specify the printer system settings, including the date format and display  
language.  
Choose Status Print to print information about the printer.  
Choose Media Details to print the paper settings as specified in Med.Detail Set. .  
Choose Print Job Log to print a record of print jobs, including the paper type and  
size, amount of ink used, and so on.  
Choose Menu Map to print a list of the main menu options.  
Choose Nozzle Check to print a test pattern for checking the nozzles.  
If you have selected a leading edge margin of 20 mm in Nr End Sht Mrgn in the  
printer menu, the test print sheet may not be printed completely.  
[Information]  
Displays the information about the printer and history of print jobs.  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
[Paper Settings]  
T-1-11  
Setting Item  
Description, Instructions  
[Cas Paper Type]  
Choose the type of paper in the Cassette .  
[Roll Media Type] Choose the type of roll.  
[Chk Remain.Roll] Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed  
barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. Choose Off if you prefer  
not to print the barcode.  
[Roll Length Set]  
Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On .  
If a barcode is not printed on rolls, specify the roll length. The roll length is displayed  
in meters (1.0 - 91.0 m) or feet (1 - 300 ft.), depending on the setting in Length Unit .  
[Paper Details]  
T-1-12  
Description, Instructions  
Setting Item  
(The paper type is  
displayed here.)  
[Roll DryingTime] Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.  
[Scan Wait Time]  
[Feed Priority]  
[Adjust Length]  
Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in  
bidirectional printing, in consideration of how quickly the paper  
absorbs ink. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a  
wait time.  
Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select  
Automatic . Choose Print Length if you prefer to feed the paper an  
exact amount. However, note that choosing Print Length may  
result in slight banding in the direction of Carriage scanning.  
Displayed if Feed Priority is Print Length .  
Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of the  
current paper. For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed  
amount by setting the adjustment value toward +. For paper that  
tends to shrink, decrease the feed amount by setting the adjustment  
value toward -.  
The setting for the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage is  
relative. If you access it again later, it will be displayed as 0.00 %.  
[Head Height]  
Adjust the Printhead height.  
[Skew Check Lv.] If you print on Japanese Paper Washi or other handmade paper that  
has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher skew detection  
threshold, or choose Off to disable skew detection.  
However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is Off , note that  
paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.  
If strict skew detection is required, choose High Accuracy.  
[VacuumStrngth]  
Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen .  
[Width Detection] Make this setting when the print size is different from the media  
size, for example, when you want to make a print within a frame.  
When you select [OFF], the paper width is not detected.  
1-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Description, Instructions  
Setting Item  
[NearEnd  
RollMrgn]  
Specify a margin at the leading edge of roll paper to ensure better  
printing quality at the leading edge.  
Note that if you choose 3 mm , it may lower the printing quality at  
the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface  
may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the the leading edge.  
[Cut Speed]  
Choose the cutting speed. For media such as film that are more  
likely to generate debris when cut, choose Fast to reduce the  
amount of debris.  
[Trim Edge First]  
[Cutting Mode]  
The leading edge of roll media is cut when it is loaded.  
Specify if the Cutter Unit is used for cutting.  
Choose Automatic to have roll paper cut automatically after  
printing. If you choose Eject , the paper will not be cut after  
printing. Instead, a line will be printed at the cut position.  
[Bordless Margin] Adjust the margin during borderless printing.  
[CutDustReduct.]  
Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when cutting  
film and similar media by printing a line at the cut position. This  
option reduces the amount of debris given off after cutting.  
[Manual Feed]  
Choose how the paper is supplied, Top for printing from the Tray  
or Front for printing from the Front Paper Feed Slot .  
[NearEnd Sht Mrgn] Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better  
printing quality at the leading edge.  
Note that if you choose 3 mm , it may lower the printing quality at  
the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed surface  
may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the the leading edge.  
If you have selected 20 mm , the test print sheet may not be printed  
completely.  
[Return Defaults]  
Choose Yes to restore Med.Detail Set. to the factory default  
values.  
[GL2 Settings]  
T-1-13  
Setting Item  
Description, Instructions  
[GL2 Replot]  
Reprint the last printed page stored in the printer.  
Delete the last printed page stored in the printer.  
Choose the color mode.  
[GL2 BufferClear]  
[Color Mode]  
[Print Quality]  
[Input Resolution]  
[Media Source]  
[Conserve Paper]  
[End Point Shape]  
[Smoothing]  
Choose the print quality.  
Select [600dpi] or [300dpi] as the print resolution.  
Select the method of feeding paper when using the HP-GL/2 for printing.  
Print using paper sparingly.  
Select [Software] or [Round] as the shape of the line end.  
Select whether to print an arc with a smooth curve or polygon.  
Select the printing line width for the data for which a line width is not  
specified.  
[Line Width]  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
[Adjust Printer]  
T-1-14  
Setting Item  
Description, Instructions  
[Auto Head Adj.]  
[Standard Adj.]  
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for  
the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to  
the printing direction.  
[Advanced Adj.]  
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for  
the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to  
the nozzle, ink tank, and printing direction.  
Three sheets are required when printing on sheets.  
[Auto Print]  
Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the  
Advanced Adj. operations after you replace the Printhead .  
[Manual Head Adj]  
[Auto Band Adj.]  
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead  
alignment relative to the printing direction. Enter the  
adjustment value manually based on the resulting pattern.  
[Standard Adj.]  
[Advanced Adj.]  
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for  
band adjustment, based on which the printer automatically  
adjusts the feed amount.  
Choose this option when using paper other than genuine  
Canon paper, or paper for purposes other than checking  
output.  
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for  
band adjustment, based on which the printer automatically  
adjusts the feed amount. Note that this function takes more  
time and requires more ink than Standard Adj.  
Two sheets are required when printing on sheets.  
[Manual Band Adj]  
[Adjust Length]  
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the feed  
amount based on the paper type.  
Two sheets are required when printing on sheets.  
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment relative to  
paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you can enter the  
amount of adjustment.  
[Adjust Head Skew]  
Selecting [Yes] will print the pattern for adjusting the print  
head inclination.  
1-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
[Interface Setup]  
T-1-15  
Setting Item  
Description, Instructions  
[EOP Timer]  
[EOP Timer]  
Specify the timeout period for print jobs.  
[TCP/IP]  
Specify the TCP/IP protocol settings. To apply your  
changes, choose Store Setting .  
[IP Mode]  
Choose whether the printer IP address is configured  
automatically or a static IP address is entered  
manually.  
[Protocol]  
[DHCP]  
Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address  
automatically.  
[BOOTP]  
[RARP]  
[IP Setting]  
[IP Address]  
[Subnet Mask]  
[Default G/W]  
Specify the printer network information when using a  
static IP address.  
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as well as  
the network subnet mask and default gateway.  
[NetWare]  
[NetWare]  
Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your  
changes, choose Store Setting .  
[Frame Type]  
[Print Service]  
Specify the frame type to use.  
Choose the print service.  
[AppleTalk]  
Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol. To  
apply your changes, choose Store Setting .  
[Ethernet Driver] [Auto Detect]  
Specify the communication method. To apply your  
changes, choose Store Setting .  
Choose On for automatic configuration of the LAN  
communication protocol. Choose Off to use settings  
values of Comm.Mode and Ethernet Type .  
[Comm.Mode]  
[Ethernet Type]  
[Spanning Tree]  
Choose the LAN communication method.  
Choose the LAN transfer rate.  
Choose whether spanning-tree packets are supported  
over the LAN.  
[MAC Address]  
[Ext.Interface]  
Displays the MAC address.  
When installing the expansion interface board,  
choose whether the expansion interface board is used.  
[Init. Settings]  
A confirmation message is displayed if you  
press the[ ] button. Choose [OK] to restore  
the network settings to the default values.  
1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
[Maintenance]  
T-1-16  
Setting Item  
[Maint. cart.]  
Description, Instructions  
When exchanging the maintenance cartridge, choose Yes and follow the  
instructions on the screen.  
[Replace P.head]  
Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance  
Cartridge capacity is low.  
When replacing the Printhead , choose Yes and follow the instructions on  
the screen.  
[Repl. S. Cleaner]  
[Change Cutter]  
When replacing the shaft cleaner, select [Yes] and take appropriate actions  
according to the instructions shown on the screen.  
When replacing the cutter unit, select [Yes] and take appropriate actions  
according to the instructions shown on the screen. Replacing the cutter unit  
will reset the cut count.  
[Move Printer]  
Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining Maintenance  
Cartridge capacity is low.  
When transferring the printer to another location, choose Yes and follow  
the instructions on the screen.  
[System Setup]  
T-1-17  
Setting Item  
[Buzzer]  
Description, Instructions  
[Warning]  
Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound in case of  
errors.  
[Detect Mismatch] Choose Warning for notification (display of a warning  
message) during printing if the paper type specified in the  
printer menu does not match the paper type in the printer  
driver. Choose None to continue print without notification.  
Choose Pause to have printing paused under these  
circumstances. In this case, you can continue printing by  
pressing the Online button.  
[Keep Media Size]  
Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis for  
printing instead of other settings. The margin setting of the  
printer menu will be used instead of the margin setting of the  
printer driver if the latter is smaller, which may prevent text  
or images in the margin from being printed. Choose Off to  
use the printer driver settings instead. Even if the margin  
setting of the printer driver is smaller than that of the printer  
driver, text or images will not be cut off. However, this  
requires longer paper because the actual margin will be equal  
to the margin setting of the printer driver plus the margin  
setting of the printer menu.  
[Paper Size Basis]  
[Sht Selection 1]  
Select which size is to be recognized, [ISO A3+] or  
[13"x19"(Super B)], when the detected size of the cut sheet  
is between these sizes.  
1-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Setting Item  
[Roll Selection 1]  
Description, Instructions  
If roll size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3  
(297 mm) and 300 mm Roll is applied when an inbetween  
size is detected.  
[Roll Selection 2]  
[Sht Selection 2]  
If roll size detection is activated, choose whether 10in. (254  
mm) or JIS B4 (257 mm) is applied when an inbetween size  
is detected.  
Select which size is to be recognized, [ISO B1] or  
[28"x40"(ANSI F)], when the detected size of the cut sheet  
is between these sizes.  
[Noz. Check Freq.]  
Specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging.  
Choose Off to disable checking. Choose 1 page to check  
after each page is printed. Choose 10 pages to check once  
after every ten pages are printed.  
[Sleep Timer]  
[Length Unit]  
Specify the period before the printer enters sleep mode.  
Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is  
displayed. You can switch the unit displayed for Roll Length  
Set and the remaining paper amount displayed in the  
submenu.  
[Time Zone]  
Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main  
city in this time zone and the difference from Greenwich  
Mean Time.  
[Date Format]  
[Date & Time]  
Specify the date format.  
[Date]  
[Time]  
Set the current date.  
Set the current time.  
[Language]  
Specify the language used on the Display Screen.  
Adjust the contrast of the Display Screen.  
[Contrast Adj.]  
[Reset PaprSetngs]  
Restores settings that you have changed with Media  
Configuration Tool to the factory default values.  
1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
[Information]  
T-1-18  
Setting Item  
[Version]  
Description, Instructions  
Displays the version of the printer and firmware.  
Displays the Boot ROM version of the printer.  
Displays the DB format version of the MIT.  
Displays the printer serial number.  
[System Info]  
[Firmware]  
[Boot]  
[MIT]  
[s/n]  
[MAC]  
Displays the MAC address of the printer.  
Displays the printer IP address.  
[IP]  
[Error Log]  
[Job Log]  
[########-####]  
Displays the most recent error messages (up to  
two).  
(Choose from  
[Document  
Displays the document name in the last print job.  
information about Name]  
the latest three  
print jobs.  
[User Name]  
Displays the name of the user who sent the print  
job.  
[Page Count]  
[Job Status]  
Displays the number of pages in the print job.  
Displays the results of the print job processed.  
[Print Start Time] Displays the time when the print job was started.  
[Print End Time] Displays the time when the print job was finished.  
[Print Time]  
[Print Size]  
[Media Type]  
[Interface]  
Displays the time required to print the job.  
Displays the paper size in the print job.  
Displays the paper type in the print job.  
Displays the interface used for the print job.  
[Ink Consumed] Displays the ink density of each color in the print  
job.  
1-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
5. Main Menu Settings (During Printing)  
Main menu items during printing are described in the following tables.  
T-1-19  
Setting Item  
Description, Instructions  
Specify Printhead cleaning options.  
[Head Cleaning]  
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign  
substances.  
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved by  
Head Cleaning A .  
[Fine Band Adj.]  
[Information]  
Displayed during print jobs. Fine-tune the feed amount manually.  
Displays the information about the printer and history of print jobs.  
[Information]  
T-1-20  
Setting Item  
[Version]  
Description, Instructions  
Displays the version of the printer and firmware.  
Displays the Boot ROM version of the printer.  
Displays the DB format version of the MIT.  
Identifies boards in the expansion slot.  
Displays the printer serial number.  
[System Info]  
[Firmware]  
[Boot]  
[MIT]  
[Ext.Interface]  
[s/n: ]  
[MAC]  
Displays the MAC address of the printer.  
Displays the printer IP address.  
[IP:]  
[Error Log]  
[Job Log]  
[########-  
####]  
Displays the most recent error messages (up to two).  
(Choose from  
information  
[Document  
Name]  
Displays the document name in the last print job.  
about the latest  
three print jobs.)  
[User Name]  
[Page Count]  
[Job Status]  
Displays the name of the user who sent the print job.  
Displays the number of pages in the print job.  
Displays the results of the print job processed.  
Displays the time when the print job was started.  
[Print Start  
Time]  
[Print End Time] Displays the time when the print job was finished.  
[Print Time]  
[Print Size]  
[Media Type]  
[Interface]  
Displays the time required to print the job.  
Displays the paper size in the print job.  
Displays the paper type in the print job.  
Displays the interface used for the print job.  
[Ink Consumed] Displays the ink density of each color in the print job.  
1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
1.7 Safety and Precautions  
1.7.1 Safety Precautions  
1.7.1.1 Moving Parts  
0013-5153  
Be careful not to get your hairs, clothing, accessories or any other objects caught in the moving parts of the  
printer.  
The moving parts of the printer include the carriage unit, carriage belt, ink tube, flexible cable and feed motor  
driven by the carriage motor and the feed and pinch rollers driven by the feed motor and the purge unit driven  
by the purge motor.  
To assure safety, the printer locks the top cover from opening while it is printing. When the top cover is opened  
while the printer is in online or offline mode, the driving power to the carriage and feed motors is shut down.  
Carriage belt  
Ink tube  
Flexible cable  
Carriage unit  
Carriage motor  
Feed roller  
purge unit  
Pinch roller  
Feed unit  
Feed motor  
F-1-16  
1-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 1  
1.7.1.2 Adhesion of Ink  
0013-5154  
a. Ink passage  
Be careful not to touch the ink passage in the printer to get the printer being serviced, workbench, your hands  
and clothes and so on smeared by the ink.  
The ink passage comprises the ink tank unit, carriage unit, purge unit, maintenance cartridge unit and the ink  
tubes that interconnect the separate parts.  
Maintenance-jet tray  
Platen  
Carriage  
Maintenance cartridge  
Purge  
Ink tank  
F-1-17  
Inks contain an organic solvent, which is not harmful to the human body, though.  
When an ink comes into the hands or any other part of your body, wash it away thoroughly. Be careful not  
to lick an ink or allow it to come into contact with your eyes.  
In the event of eye contact, immediately wash with water thoroughly and obtain medical attention.  
Also, if you have swallowed an ink in a large quantity by mistake, obtain medical attention immediately.  
Inks contain a pigment and would not come off once they adhere to clothing.  
1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
b. Ink mists  
As the printhead jets an ink against paper to print, traces of ink mists floating during printing or springing  
back from the paper are produced in the print station. Such ink mists are collected by mist collection air flow  
into the printer. The uncollected portion of ink mists could smear the platen unit, carriage unit, exterior  
surfaces and the purge unit, and their surrounding areas.  
Such smears could in turn spoil the paper or your hands or clothes during servicing. Wipe such smears off  
with a soft cloth moistened with water and wrung carefully.  
Platen/carriage unit  
Top cover  
Purge unit  
F-1-18  
1.7.1.3 Electric Parts  
0013-5155  
Any electrical portion of the printer becomes live when AC power is supplied to it.  
The main controller, power supply and interface connector are found on the left rear side of the printer, with the  
operation panel being located on the upper right cover.  
In checking printer operations with the cover open during servicing, take maximum care to avoid electrical  
shocks and not to cause damage to electrical components.  
1-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
Operation panel  
Carriage Relay PCB  
Carriage PCB  
Power connector  
Power supply  
Main controller  
Interface connector  
F-1-19  
1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
1.7.2 Other Precautions  
1.7.2.1 Printhead  
0013-1936  
a. Handling the printhead  
Do not unpack the printhead until it is ready for immediate use.  
When mounting the printhead on the printer, remove protective caps 1 and 2 in this order by holding them  
by the lugs. To prevent possible damage to the nozzle section, do not replace protective cap 2 on the  
printhead once it has been removed.  
After the printhead is removed of its protective caps, assemble it into the printer promptly to prevent the  
nozzles from being clogged by foreign matter adhering to the printhead to or a dried ink.  
Depress the printhead fixer lever until it clicks into position.  
To prevent the problems of nozzle clogging and poor ink suction that may be caused by adhering foreign  
matter, never touch the nozzle section and the ink port of the printhead or never wipe their surfaces with  
tissue paper or the like. Remember also to keep hands of the electrode section.  
The printhead cannot be disassembled/reassembled or rinsed in water.  
Memo:  
A clogged nozzle or poorly sucked ink could result in a print defect, such as a periodic print void or poor  
coloring. If these problems persist even after cleaning, replace the printhead with a new one.  
[1]  
[4]  
[2]  
[6]  
[3]  
[5]  
F-1-20  
T-1-21  
[1] Lugs  
[4] Nozzle section  
[5] Electrode section  
[6] Ink port  
[2] Protective cap 1  
[3] Protective cap 2  
1-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
b. Capping action  
The printer performs a capping action at the end of printing or when it stands by in the wake of an error  
occurrence, to protect the printhead and prevent ink leaks.  
If the printer has been powered off by inadvertently disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet,  
reconnect the power cord to the wall out and turn on the power key. When the printer starts up successfully  
to enter online or offline mode, turn off the power key.  
Failure to perform a capping action successfully could result in problems, such as printhead nozzles clogged  
by a dried ink or inks leaking from the printhead.  
c. When leaving the printer of service  
Even when the printer is out of service, store it with the printhead mounted on it.  
Leaving the printer with the printhead removed from it could allow foreign matter to adhere to the printhead  
or dry an ink, resulting in clogged nozzles to cause print defects.  
If the printhead is drained of inks for shipping purposes even though it is kept mounted on the printer, the  
nozzles could dry, resulting in print defects.  
d. Ink conductivity  
The inks used are conductive. If an ink is found to leak to the mechanical assembly, wipe it off with a soft  
cloth moistened with water and wrung thoroughly. If an ink is found to leak to the electrical assembly, blot  
it with tissue paper or the like and wipe it off thoroughly. If wiping off a leaking ink thoroughly is difficult,  
replace with a new component.  
Energizing the printer with the electrical assembly being wetted with an ink could cause damage to it.  
Never connect the power cord to the wall outlet while the electrical assembly is wet with an ink.  
1.7.2.2 Ink Tank  
0012-6229  
a. Opening ink tanks  
Do not unpack ink tanks until they are ready for immediate use.  
When placing an ink tank in position, shake it slowly seven to eight times before opening it. Without  
shaking, the ingredients of the ink might settle, resulting in degraded print quality.  
Once an ink tank is opened, mount it in the printer promptly to prevent any foreign matter from sticking to  
the ink port.  
b. Handling ink tanks  
1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
To prevent foreign matter from infiltrating the ink passage to impair ink suction or print quality, never touch  
contact [3] or ink port [4] of ink tank [1].  
Depressing ink tank cover [2] of the printer would cause a needle to pierce the ink port, linking the ink  
passage of linking ink tank [1] to the printer.  
Do not lift up and down ink tank cover [2] except for purposes other than replacing ink tank [1].  
[1]  
[2]  
[4]  
[3]  
F-1-21  
1.7.2.3 Handling the Printer  
0013-1880  
a. Protecting against electrostatic breakdowns  
Pieces of clothing rubbing each other could build up static electricity, producing static charges in human  
bodies to cause harm to an electrical component or corrupt its electrical characteristics.  
You are strongly advised never to touch the printhead contact of the carriage.  
[1]Contact with the printhead  
[1]  
F-1-22  
1-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
b. Securing the carriage in position  
The carriage is mechanically locked by the lock arm in the purge unit at the same time as the printhead caps  
itself at the end of printing.  
Before shipping the printer, secure the carriage at the home position with a belt stopper so the carriage won't  
be damaged when it is released from the lock arm or inks won't leak during transit.  
F-1-23  
c. Contact of Linear Scale/Carriage Shaft  
Please do not touch a linear scale and the carriage shaft when the inside of the top cover is opened, and execute  
maintenance.  
When touching a linear scale and the carriage shaft, it might cause defective movement of the carriage and a  
defective print.  
[1]  
[2]  
F-1-24  
[1] Linear Scale  
[2] Carriage Shaft  
1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
d. Handling maintenance cartridges  
Be careful in unloading a maintenance cartridge from the printer not to keep the used ink from spilling over.  
e. Refilling the printer with inks  
If the printer has been purged of inks through an automatic or manual ink drain for disassembly/reassembly  
or for reshipping, refill the printer with inks as soon as possible after the completion of the work.  
If residual inks in the printer dry, they could seize mechanical components, with the result of malfunctioning.  
1.7.3 Precautions When Servicing Printer  
1.7.3.1 Notes on the Data Stored in the Printer  
0013-5152  
This printer counts the print length, number of ink tank replacements, number of cleaning operations, number  
of cutter operations, and so on and stores them in the main controller's EEPROM as a service mode counter.  
This counter provides important information about the printer usage status.  
You can check this information by printing it in the service mode or displaying it on the display.  
Following the precautions below when servicing the printer.  
(1) Repairing/replacing the PCB  
When replacing the main controller, follow the specified replacement procedure.  
For the main controller replacement procedure, see "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Points to Note on  
Disassembly and Reassembly" > "Boards".  
(2) After replacing the purge unit  
The information about the number of cleanings arises in the purge unit. After replacing the purge unit, select  
[INITIALIZE] > [PURGE] in the service mode to initialize (clear) the information about the number of  
cleanings.  
(3) On replacement of supplies  
After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service  
mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.  
For the consumable parts, see "Maintenance" > "Consumable Parts".  
You cannot check the counter information once it is initialized (cleared). Be careful not to initialize the  
counter information before checking it.  
You cannot modify the counter information from the operation panel.  
1.7.3.2 Confirming the Firmware Version  
0013-5148  
Firmware has been downloaded to the main controller.  
When you have replaced the main controller, check that the firmware is the latest version. If not, update it to the  
latest version.  
Reference:  
For how to up update the main controller, refer to "TROUBLESHOOTING" > "Update".  
1.7.3.3 Precautions against Static Electricity  
0013-5149  
Certain clothing may generate static electricity, causing an electrical charge to build up on your body. Such a  
charge can damage electrical devices or change their electrical characteristics.  
1-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 1  
Before disassembling the printer for servicing, discharge any static buildup by touching a grounded metal fitting  
or the like.  
1.7.3.4 Precautions for Disassembly/Reassembly  
0013-5150  
The precautions for disassembly/reassembly are described in "Disassembly/Reassembly".  
1.7.3.5 Self-diagnostic Feature  
0013-5151  
The printer has a self-diagnostic feature to analyze hardware problems.  
The self-diagnosis result is shown on the display and indicated by lamps.  
For detailed information, see "Error Codes".  
1.7.3.6 Disposing of the Lithium Battery  
0013-5385  
The main controller PCB of this printer is equipped with a lithium battery to back up various data.  
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.  
Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.  
"For CA, USA Only  
Included battery contains Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply. See  
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for detail."  
1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Contents  
2.1 Basic Operation Outline ................................................................................... 2-1  
2.1.1 Printer Diagram .......................................................................................................... 2-1  
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence............................................................................................... 2-2  
2.1.3 Print Driving................................................................................................................. 2-3  
2.2 Firmware............................................................................................................. 2-6  
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on........................................................................... 2-6  
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off........................................................................... 2-7  
2.2.3 Print Control................................................................................................................ 2-8  
2.2.4 Print Position Adjustment Function....................................................................... 2-14  
2.2.5 Head Management .................................................................................................. 2-14  
2.2.6 Printhead Overheating Protection Control ........................................................... 2-14  
2.2.7 Pause between Pages ............................................................................................ 2-15  
2.2.8 White Raster Skip .................................................................................................... 2-15  
2.2.9 Sleep Mode............................................................................................................... 2-15  
2.3 Printer Mechanical System............................................................................ 2-16  
2.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................2-16  
2.3.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................. 2-16  
2.3.2 Ink Passage ..............................................................................................................2-17  
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage......................................................................................................................... 2-17  
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit....................................................................................................................... 2-19  
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit....................................................................................................................... 2-22  
2.3.2.4 Printhead.............................................................................................................................. 2-25  
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit............................................................................................................................ 2-26  
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge ...................................................................................................... 2-32  
2.3.2.7 Air Flow ................................................................................................................................ 2-33  
2.3.3 Paper Path ................................................................................................................2-33  
2.3.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................. 2-33  
2.3.3.2 Paper Path........................................................................................................................... 2-35  
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit............................................................................................................................ 2-36  
2.4 Printer Electrical System................................................................................ 2-37  
2.4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................2-37  
2.4.1.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 2-37  
2.4.2 Main Controller .........................................................................................................2-39  
2.4.2.1 Main controller components.............................................................................................. 2-39  
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB ................................................................................................2-41  
2.4.3.1 Carriage relay PCB components ..................................................................................... 2-41  
2.4.4 Head Relay PCB ......................................................................................................2-41  
2.4.4.1 Head relay PCB components........................................................................................... 2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
2.4.5 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB ...................................................................... 2-42  
2.4.5.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components............................................................. 2-42  
2.4.6 Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 2-42  
2.4.6.1 Power supply block diagram ............................................................................................ 2-42  
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors................................................................. 2-43  
2.5.1 Sensors for covers.................................................................................................. 2-43  
2.5.2 Ink passage system................................................................................................ 2-44  
2.5.3 Carriage system ...................................................................................................... 2-47  
2.5.4 Paper path system.................................................................................................. 2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2.1 Basic Operation Outline  
2.1.1 Printer Diagram  
0017-4681  
Shown below is a printer diagram.  
Multi  
Head  
sensor  
Main controller PCB  
J1801  
IC601/IC602  
IC603/IC604  
IC301/IC302  
SDRAM  
Power supply PCB  
J201  
Head relay PCB  
IC802  
EEPROM  
IC701  
FLASH ROM  
IC204/  
IC205  
IC201  
J101  
J102  
IC1  
ASIC  
Operation panel PCB  
IC803  
RTC  
Maintenance cartridge  
relay PCB  
BAT 801  
Lithium battery  
Linear  
encoder  
sensor  
USB  
Maintenance cartridge  
ROM PCB  
IEEE1394 Board  
LAN  
J201  
IC1201  
LAN Controller  
Ink tank  
J101  
J102  
J103  
J3401  
J3601  
J3602  
Ink tank  
J2601  
ROM PCB  
IC2  
ASIC  
IC302  
Solenoid/Clutch  
J3301  
J601  
J702  
Upper cover lock solenoid (R)  
Upper cover lock solenoid (L)  
Roll media rewinding clutch  
J3201/  
J3202  
Carriage relay PCB  
J202  
J2702/J2703  
J2704  
Sensor  
J2501/J2502  
J2503/J2701  
J2704/J3001  
J3004/J3201  
J3202  
Carriage cover sensor  
J2704  
Fan  
Suction fan  
Mist fan (R)  
Mist fan (L)  
Sensor /Switch  
J2501/J2502  
J2503/J2801  
J3101  
Valve open /closed detection sensor  
Feed roller HP sensor  
Feed roller encoder sensor  
Lift cam sensor  
Media sensor  
Pump cam sensor  
Pump encoder sensor  
Ink detection sensor  
Temperature/humidity sensor  
Head management sensor  
Ink tank cover switch  
IC2802/IC2900  
IC2902/IC3100  
Motor driver  
Motor  
Carriage motor  
Feed motor  
Lift motor  
Purge motor  
Valve motor  
Upper cover lock switch (R)  
Upper cover lock switch (L)  
Pressure release switch  
F-2-1  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
2.1.2 Print Signal Sequence  
0017-4696  
The signal sequence from when the printer receives the print signals until printing starts is shown in Figure.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Image data  
Mask pattern data  
Heat pulse  
Command data  
PCI bus  
Data bus  
Universal sirial bus  
Host computer  
Printer driver  
a
a
Interface unit  
Expansion  
USB  
LAN  
b
b
b
i
ASIC (IC1/L-COA)  
EEPROM  
Printhead  
EEPROM  
Image processing  
unit  
c
g
DDR-SDRAM  
SDR-SDRAM  
d
f
f
Carriage PCB  
Latch IC  
e
FLASH ROM  
e,h  
e
e
i
Ink tank  
h
EEPROM  
ASIC (IC2)  
i
Operation panel  
Sensor and drive unit  
i
Main controller  
F-2-2  
a) The printer driver on the host computer transmits print data, including command data, to the printer after  
compressing the image data, without resolution, color and 12-color binarization conversion.  
To achieve high-quality image output, the image processing table data used for image data color conversion and  
binarization conversion are generated as command data to meet the Media Type and other specifications of the  
printer driver.  
b) This printer receives print data from the individual interfaces on the main controller, transmitting the received  
print data to ASIC (IC1).  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
c) The main controller decompresses the print data transmitted to the ASIC and gets it through resolution, color  
and 5-color binarization conversion while loading the data into DDR-SDRAM from time to time.  
It also converts the print data to 5-color binary equivalents of image and command data.  
d) The ASIC (IC1) generates image data synthesized with mask data within the ASIC in sync with the discharge  
time while loading the data into DDR-SDRAM from time to time.  
e) The ASIC (IC2) collects printhead information from EEPROM mounted on the printheads and the printer  
temperature from the latch IC on the carriage board and transmit them to the ASIC (IC1).  
The ASIC (IC1) also receives mask pattern data from the firmware installed in flash ROM.  
f) The ASIC (IC1) converts the image data synthesized with the mask pattern to data associated with the  
printhead information and the printer temperature, transmitting the data to the printheads as a print signal. It  
transmits heat pulses to the printheads at the same time to optimize head driving.  
g) The printheads convert the received print signal from a serial signal to a parallel signal for each row of nozzles  
and ANDs it with the heat pulses for perform printing.  
h) The ASIC (IC1) controls the general aspects of image processing and print drive control by detecting the  
status of the individual printer components with reference to the adjustment values stored in EEPROM. SDR-  
SDRAM is used as work memory.  
i) The ASIC (IC2) controls the general aspects of drive control by controlling button actuations and message  
displays on the basis of the firmware installed in flash ROM.  
2.1.3 Print Driving  
0013-5398  
Print and control signals are transferred via the carriage relay PCB and head relay PCB to the printheads to  
discharge inks from the nozzle assembly at printing.  
Each printhead has 12 trains of nozzles arranged in a zigzag pattern.  
This printer uses one printhead.  
(In installed state, from left to right, C, M, Y, MBK, MBK, BK)  
Print signals directed at each nozzle train are even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV) and odd-  
numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD). These are transferred in timing with a data transfer clock (Hx-  
CLK) and data latch pulses (Hx-LT).  
The Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) drive control signal enables inks to be discharged from the nozzles.  
1. Pint drive control  
Each train of nozzles in a printhead has 2,560 nozzles.  
Ink discharge nozzles are selected split in 40-, 20- or 10-nozzle blocks according to the Block Enable  
information in the even-numbered nozzle data and odd-numbered nozzle data.  
Each selected block of nozzles is impressed with a Heat Enable signal generated with variable pulse widths  
according to the head rank, head temperature and printer temperature for optimized ink discharges. The nozzles  
are driven by heater boards in the nozzles to discharge inks. Optimal nozzle blocks are selected according to  
the print path.  
The diagram below illustrates the relationship between a 40-block nozzle and nozzles driven.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 1213 1415 1617 1819 2021 2223 24252627282930313233343536373839  
Block No.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
2559  
The pattern is repeated until 2560 nozzles is reached.  
F-2-3  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2. Print drive timing  
Each printhead houses 12 trains of nozzles, which share the same data transfer clock (Hx-CLK) and data latch  
pulses (Hx-LT).  
Even-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-EV), odd-numbered nozzle data (Hx-x-DATA-x-OD) and the  
Heat Enable (Hx-x-HE-x) signal are generated for each nozzle train and controlled individually.  
Printing is carried out in two ways through reciprocating motion of the carriage.  
An encoder sensor mounted on the carriage generates a 150-dpi-pitched linear scale detection signal  
(ENCODER_A) and a signal (ENCODER_B) shifted 120 degrees in phase. The direction of carriage motion  
is detected from the status of the ENCODER_B signal relative to the leading edge of the ENCODER_A signal.  
The printhead is driven using a 2400-dpi timing signal (internal signal), which is generated by dividing the  
ENCODER_A signal detected at the 150 dpi timing into 16 equal sections.  
Printing in the forward direction is triggered at the leading edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A).  
Printing in the backward direction is carried out the same way as printing in the forward direction but at the  
trailing edge of the detection signal (ENCODER_A), when the order of heated nozzles is reversed depending  
on the sequence of transfer of even-numbered nozzle data and odd-numbered nozzle data.  
150dpi  
Linear scale  
ENCODER_A  
ENCODER_B  
2400dpi  
Internal signal  
2400dpi  
H0_CLK  
H0_A_DATA_0_EV  
H0_A_DATA_1_EV  
H0_A_DATA_0_OD  
H0_A_DATA_1_OD  
Data of block 0  
Data of block 2  
Data of block 4  
Data of block 22  
Data of block 0  
Data of block 0  
Data of block 2  
Data of block 2  
Data of block 4  
Data of block 4  
Data of block 22  
Data of block 22  
Data of block 0  
Data of block 2  
Data of block 4  
Data of block 22  
H0_LT  
H0_A_HE_1  
Low active  
F-2-4  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2.2 Firmware  
2.2.1 Operation Sequence at Power-on  
0013-5399  
The sequence of printer operations, from power-on to transition to online mode, is flowcharted below.  
* This flowchart does not include the times spent supply inks and cleaning after leaving the printer for extended  
periods of time.  
Power Button ON  
Initialization of software  
Initialization of various devices  
Device/resource  
initializarion  
Engine startup status check  
Previous power-off status check,etc.  
Engine status check  
Printhead installation status check  
Ink tank installation status check  
EEPROM check  
Printhead/  
ink tank check  
Cassette pick-up unit initialization  
Roll feed unit initialization  
Roll feed unit initialization  
Sensor check  
Media feed system  
initialization  
Recovery system return to origin  
Sensor check  
Recovery system  
initialization  
Carriage motor return to origin  
Carriage position  
initialization  
Remaining ink level detection/  
Waste ink level detection  
Power-on  
automatic recovery operation  
Capping  
Waiting for print operation  
F-2-5  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
2.2.2 Operation Sequence at Power-off  
0013-5400  
Turning off the power switch cuts off the drive voltage supply, launching a firmware power-off sequence as  
shown below.  
If the power cord is disconnected from the wall outlet or the top cover or any other cover is opened, the printer  
cancels the ongoing operation and shuts down immediately. Since printhead capping may or may not have  
been carried out properly, reconnect the power cord to the wall out and turn on the power switch. Making  
sure that the printer has entered online or offline mode, turn off the power switch.  
Hold down for at least once second  
Power button OFF  
If media remains,it is ejected even  
Media ejection  
when printing is in progress.  
Power-off automatic recovery  
Capping  
Sensor system power OFF  
Writing to EEPROM  
Backup of various data  
Power-off  
F-2-6  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
2.2.3 Print Control  
0017-4712  
1. Print mode  
This printer is capable of fast, high-quality printing without blur and non-uniform density by changing the  
carriage operation, media feeding, other printing methods according to the selected media type, print quality,  
print data and so on.  
Printing is performed for each color using a maximum of 16 paths in each print mode according to the selected  
print quality.  
This reduces density irregularities caused by the variation in the amounts of ink discharged from individual  
nozzles. In addition, it shifts the printing timing so that the current ink layer is nearly fixed before the next ink  
layer is applied, thus minimizing bleeding.  
Even in the same mode, the printer operates in a different way depending on the media setting made using the  
printer driver.  
a) Draft mode  
In the draft mode, image data is thinned out and a single band (equivalent to the width of a nozzle array) is  
printed using one path.  
To use this mode, select "Draft" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.  
b) Standard mode  
In the standard mode, a single band (equivalent to the width of a nozzle array) is printed using 1-6 (1, 2, 4 or 6)  
paths.  
To use this mode, select "Standard" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.  
c) High quality mode  
In the high quality mode, a single band is printed using 2, 4 or 8 paths.  
To use this mode, select "High" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.  
d) Highest quality mode  
In the high quality mode, a single band is printed using 8, 12 or 16 paths.  
To use this mode, select "Highest" under "Print Quality" in the printer driver.  
T-2-1  
Printing Modes  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
T-2-2  
Print  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
UsedBK  
ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Plain  
Plain Paper  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
Paper/  
Recycled  
Paper  
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
1
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
Plain Paper (High  
Quality)  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
Plain Paper (High Grade) Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
All Plain  
Paper_Conserve MBK  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Print  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
UsedBK  
ink  
Media Type  
Economy Bond Paper  
Print Priority  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Single-directional  
Single-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
1
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
Universal Bond Paper  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
Standard Paper 1569B  
80g  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
Standard Paper 1570B  
90g  
Office Document Standard  
1/2  
1
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
1
2
2
Image  
Draft  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Print  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
UsedBK  
ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Coated Coated Paper  
Paper  
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1
2
Standard  
High  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 BK  
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
Heavyweight Coated  
Paper  
Line Document/  
Text  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
Extra Heavyweight  
Coated Paper  
Line Document/  
Text  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
Recycled Coated Paper  
Line Document/  
Text  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Standard  
High  
4
8
Highest  
Draft  
12  
1
Premium Matte Paper  
Line Document/  
Text  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Image  
Image  
Standard  
High  
6
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
4
Colored Coated Paper  
Premium Coated Paper  
8
1200x1200 BK  
Line Document/  
Text  
Draft  
1
1200x1200 BK  
1
1200x1200 BK  
Standard  
2
1200x1200 BK  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Print  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
UsedBK  
ink  
Media Type  
Glossy Photo Paper  
Print Priority  
Image  
Photo  
Paper  
Standard  
High  
6
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
Semi-Glossy Photo Paper Image  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Heavyweight Glossy  
Photo Paper 2  
Image  
Image  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Heavywght SemiGlos  
Photo Paper 2  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Satin Photographic Paper Image  
190gsm  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Premium RC Photo  
Luster , 10 mil  
Image  
Image  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Instant Dry Papers  
Glossy 200g  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Instant Dry Papers Satin Image  
200g  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Photo Paper High Glossy Image  
250g  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Photo Paper Semi Matt  
250g  
Image  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Photo Paper Satin 240g Image  
Photo Paper Pearl 260g Image  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
8
Highest  
16  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Print  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
UsedBK  
ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Image  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Proofing Proofing Paper  
Paper  
Standard  
High  
6
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
2400x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 BK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
Professional Proof and  
Image  
Photo Glossy 195g  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Professional Proof and  
Photo Semiglossy 195g  
Image  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Professional Proof and  
Photo Semigloss 255g  
Image  
Image  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Syntheti Synthetic Paper  
c Paper  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Adhesive Synthetic Paper Image  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Adhesiv High Resolution Graphic Image  
e Matt  
Paper  
Paper Self ADH  
8
Highest  
Draft  
16  
1
CAD  
CAD Tracing Paper  
Line Document/  
Text  
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
CAD Translucent Matte Line Document/  
Film Text  
Draft  
1
1
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
CAD Translucent Matte Line Document/  
Film Text  
Standard  
High  
2
4
4
Highest  
8
8
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Print  
Printing Direction Resolution  
(dpi)  
Print  
Quality  
Print-  
Pass  
UsedBK  
ink  
Media Type  
Print Priority  
Image  
Special Special 1  
Standard  
High  
6
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
Bi-directional  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
1200x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
2400x1200 MBK  
Special 2  
Image  
Image  
Image  
Image  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Special 3  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Special 4  
8
Highest  
Standard  
High  
16  
6
Special 5  
8
Highest  
16  
2.2.4 Print Position Adjustment Function  
0012-6248  
This printer supports a print position adjustment function to adjust the vertical and horizontal print position and  
the bidirectional print position of the print head mounted on the carriage and the feed rate.  
Print position adjustment work in two modes: automatic adjustment, in which print position adjustment patterns  
printed are detected by a multisensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage, and manual adjustment, in  
which print position adjustment patterns that are slightly modified from one another are printed, so that visually  
verified adjustment values can be set from the operation panel.  
To make print position adjustment, A4-or-larger-sized roll media or cut media are needed.  
2.2.5 Head Management  
0012-6249  
This printer supports a nozzle check function to spot non-discharging nozzles in the printhead. When the printer  
detects a non-discharging nozzle, it starts cleaning the printhead automatically to correct its discharge failure.  
If cleaning does not work, the printer backs up the non-discharging nozzle with an alternative nozzle  
automatically to ensure unfailing print performance.  
Detection timings (automatic): Power-on, open carriage cover detection, print start (check timing variable by  
selecting Nozzle Check from the system menu)  
2.2.6 Printhead Overheating Protection Control  
0012-6251  
When an abnormal temperature rise in the printhead is detected, overtemperature protection control launches.  
Overtemperatures could occur in the printhead after a spell of print operations without the nozzles being filled  
with inks.  
Overtemperature protection control prevents non-discharge failures and damages that might result from an  
overheated printhead.  
overtemperature protection control is implemented on the basis of the temperature detected by the head  
temperature sensor for each nozzle. When an abnormal temperature is detected in any nozzle train,  
overtemperature protection control is exerted at one of two levels according to that temperature.  
Protection level 1  
If the head temperature sensor (DI sensor) has detected a temperature higher than the protection temperature, it  
halts the carriage temporarily at the scan end position in the direction of travel according to the carriage scan  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2  
status.  
Printing resumes when the printhead radiates naturally to cool down to below a predetermined temperature or  
when 30 seconds or longer have elapsed since the detection of the temperature higher than the protection  
temperature.  
Protection level 2  
When the head temperature sensor (DI sensor) has detected an abnormal temperature, the printer shuts down the  
print operation immediately, moving the carriage to the home position for capping, with an error indication on  
the display.  
2.2.7 Pause between Pages  
0012-6252  
An inter-page function is available to prevent ink rubbing, which keeps paper just printed hanging above the  
platen and waiting for a predetermined period of time before delivery.  
The wait time is user-programmable from the print driver. This feature is particularly useful on paper that takes  
time to dry after printing.  
A 30-second drying time is set automatically for borderless printing.  
2.2.8 White Raster Skip  
0012-6253  
This printer supports a white raster skip function to bypass carriage scanning in a consecutive sequence of voids  
in print data for added throughput.  
2.2.9 Sleep Mode  
0012-6255  
The printer has sleep mode to save on its standby power requirement.  
The printer transitions to sleep mode automatically when it has been left idle or no print data has been received  
for a predetermined period of time while the printer is online or offline.  
The printer exits sleep mode when any operation panel key is activated or print data is received from the host  
computer.  
The time to transition to sleep mode is variable from the operation panel.  
(Default: 5 minutes)  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2  
2.3 Printer Mechanical System  
2.3.1 Outline  
2.3.1.1 Outline  
0012-6256  
The printer mechanism is broken down into two broad sections: the passage and paper passage.  
Consisting mainly of a carriage unit that houses ink tanks and a printhead, and a maintenance cartridge, the ink  
passage supplies, circulates, sucks and otherwise handles inks.  
The paper passage consists of such mechanical components as a paper unit and is designed to feed, convey and  
deliver paper in two ways.  
A summary description of each mechanical component is given below.  
Purge unit  
Carriage unit  
Paper feed  
Maintenance cartridge  
Ink tank unit  
F-2-7  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2  
2.3.2 Ink Passage  
2.3.2.1 Ink Passage  
2.3.2.1.1 Overview of Ink Passage  
0013-6730  
The ink passage comprises ink tanks, a printhead, caps, a waste ink collector, ink tubes interconnecting the  
mechanical components, and a suction pump that is driven to suck inks. It supplies, circulates, sucks and  
otherwise handles inks.  
The ink passage (per color) is schematically shown below, along with the ink flow.  
Mechanical Drive Unit  
Ink or air flow  
Carriage unit  
Joint  
Ink tank  
Printhead  
Agitation plate  
Suction pump  
Cap  
Sub buffer  
Ink supply valve  
Maintenance cartridge  
F-2-8  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
a) Supplying inks from the ink tanks to the ink supply valve assembly  
The ink tanks each contain an ink to feed the printhead.  
Head differences allow the inks to flow from the ink tanks to the ink supply valves.  
b) Inks flowing from the ink tanks into the subbuffer  
As the inks flow from the ink tanks to the subbuffers due to head differences, air infiltrates the ink tanks through  
air passages in the subbuffers to keep its internal pressure constant.  
When the ink stored in a subbuffer exceeds a predetermined level, it flows into the absorber under the ink tank  
through the air passage.  
c) Supplying inks from the ink supply valves to the printhead  
The ink stored in an ink tank flows to the printhead when the suction pipe is driven with the ink supply valve  
opened and the head capped.  
As an ink is sucked from the caps, it flows into the waste ink absorber under the maintenance cartridge or purge  
unit.  
d) Ink supply while printing  
The ink supply valves are kept open while printing, so that inks are being constantly fed to the printhead under  
the negative pressure of the nozzle assembly caused by discharging inks.  
Further, waste inks sucked in a cleaning operation and inks from borderless printing flow into the waste ink  
absorber under the maintenance cartridge and into the waste ink box.  
When an ink tube filled with ink, opening all whole ink passages (by opening both the ink supply valve and the  
printhead fixer lever with an ink tank yet to be installed) could cause the ink in the ink tube to flow backward  
due to a head difference, leaking through the hollow needle in the ink tank.  
As a precaution, never open all the ink passages at the same time while the ink tubes are filled with inks.  
e) Agitating the ink in an ink tank  
To prevent the pigment ink stored in a tank from settling, the ink needs to be agitated.  
The ink supply valve is continuously opened and closed to cause the ink to flow back into the tank for agitation.  
Each ink tank contains an agitating plate to aid in agitating of the ink. (An agitating plate is also installed in the  
dye ink tank.)  
-Operation timing: Whenever a new tank is installed or 168 hours have expired since the agitation was last  
carried out (agitation is carried out regardless of whether printing or cleaning is in progress).  
-Ink supply valve open/closed: 30 times (30 seconds)  
If 336 hours or more have elapsed, the ink supply valve open/closed count and the time to the next session of  
agitation are varied according to the elapsed time.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2.3.2.2 Ink Tank Unit  
2.3.2.2.1 Structure of Ink Tank Unit  
0013-6934  
a) Ink tanks  
Each color-specific ink tank is filled with 130 mL of ink (90 mL for the starter ink tanks bundled with the  
printer). The ink level in each ink tank is memorized in EEPROM attached to the tank and is detected as a dot  
count on the basis of the EEPROM information.  
When an electrode attached to a hollow needle detects no continuity, it displays a message reporting that the ink  
tank is nearly empty. If the dot count reaches a predesigned value in this state, an ink out condition is assumed.  
b) Ink port  
Depressing the ink tank fixer lever on the printer would cause would cause a hollow needle to pierce the ink port  
sealed by a rubber plug, linking the ink passage of the ink tank to the printer.  
c) Air passage  
Depressing the ink tank fixer lever on the printer would cause an open hollow needle to pierce the air passage  
sealed by a rubber plug, releasing the internal pressure of the ink tank to keep it constant.  
d) Notches for preventing incorrect installation  
Ink tanks are furnished with a notch for preventing incorrect installation. If the installation of an ink tank in  
incorrect position is attempted, the notch would interfere with it, preventing its installation.  
The ink tank fixer lever won't lower without the ink tank fully inserted to reach the mounting position, so the  
ink cannot be supplied.  
e) Agitating plate  
Assists in the agitation of pigment inks during ink agitation carried out to prevent their settlement.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
Notches for preventing  
incorrect installation  
Notches for preventing  
incorrect installation  
Air passage  
Ink port  
EEPROM  
Agitation plate  
Notches for preventing  
incorrect installation  
Ink tank  
F-2-9  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
f) Ink supply valves  
Located halfway between the ink tanks and the ink tubes, the ink supply valves prevent the leakage of inks that  
might otherwise be caused by the opening of the ink tubes on the side of the ink tanks during their replacement.  
The ink supply valves are caused to open and close by the valve open/close mechanism that is activated by  
driving the valve motors.  
The ink tank unit comprises two tank bases, each integrated for a set of three colors, and six-color ink tubes.  
The color-specific ink supply valves are linked with the valve cams so they will open and close at the same time  
for all colors.  
Valve cam  
Valve motor  
Linkage  
Valve open/closed detection sensor  
Linkage  
Ink supply valve  
F-2-10  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2.3.2.3 Carriage Unit  
2.3.2.3.1 Functions of Carriage Unit  
0013-5642  
a) Printhead mounting function  
The carriage, which fixes the printhead in position mechanically, is connected to the contact of the head relay  
PCB.  
b) Control function  
The carriage carries a carriage relay PCB, which relays printhead drive signals, and an encoder, which generates  
print timing signals. The carriage relay PCB is connected to the main controller by a flexible cable.  
c) Carriage drive function  
The carriage is caused to reciprocate level on t he plat en by means of the carriage belt that is driven by the power  
imparted from the carriage motor.  
d) Printhead maintenance function  
This printer performs cleaning operations, such as wiping the printhead and sucking inks, with the carriage  
halted at its home position.  
e) Nozzle check function  
This printer carries out an ink discharge operation with the carriage halted at the maintenance jet tray, locating  
the nozzles in the printhead failing to discharge with a head management sensor attached to the head  
management sensor.  
f) Carriage height adjustment function  
The separation between the face of the printhead and the paper varies with each paper thickness. A narrow gap  
makes quality better but could smear the print surface as a result of paper rubbing against the face or cause  
damage to the nozzle assembly.  
T-2-3  
Media type Environmental condition  
Head height (mm)  
(Temperature:15-25,Humidity:40%-60%)  
1.45  
1.75  
2.05  
2.35  
2.65  
Glossy Paper,Plain Paper(Line drawing)  
Plain Paper,Heavyweight Coated Paper(Line drawing)  
Heavyweight Coated Paper  
Premium Matte Paper  
Premium Matte Paper(Temperature:15-30,Humidity:10%-40%)  
g) Paper width detection function/skew detection function  
The multisensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage detects the width of paper fed on the platen and  
skews in it.  
h) Automatic printhead position adjustment function  
The multisensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage reads the result of an adjustment pattern printed,  
allowing for automatic adjustment of the printhead position accordingly.  
i) Remaining roll media detection function  
The printer prints a bar code on roll media when they are unloaded. The multisensor attached to the lower left  
part of the carriage indicates the remaining volume of roll media.  
j) Internal unit temperature sensor  
A thermistor installed on the head relay PCB detects the internal unit temperature near the printhead.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
2.3.2.3.2 Structure of Carriage Unit  
0012-6265  
a) Printhead mount  
The printhead is secured to the carriage by the printhead fixer cover and the printhead fixer lever. When the  
printhead is secured to the carriage, the signal contact of the head relay PCB is pressed against that of the  
printhead to convey print signals. Further, the ink passage from the ink tanks is connected to the printhead via  
the ink tubes.  
b) Ink port  
Ink is supplied to the printhead via an ink tube, which runs between the tube guides via joints to reach the  
carriage and follows up its motion.  
Contact  
Printhead lock cover  
Ink supply joint  
Printhead lock lever  
ube guide  
Carriage motor  
Carriage  
Ink tube  
F-2-11  
c) Control unit  
The carriage relay PCB is connected to the head relay PCB by means of a flexible cable. The flexible cable  
between the main controller and the carriage relay PCB follows up the motion of the carriage together with the  
tube guide.  
A photocoupler encoder mounted in the lower part of the back of the carriage detects a linear scale reading as  
the carriage moves.  
d) Carriage drive  
Mechanical misregistrations in the vertical/horizontal and bidirectional print positions of the printhead mounted  
can be corrected by selecting Adjusting Printer from the [MAIN MENU] to [Adjust Printer].  
A DC-operated carriage motor drives the carriage in the horizontal direction of paper by way of the carriage.  
The carriage home position, is where the carriage is slowly brought to the right end at power-on initialization.  
When the linear scale position is set as a reference home position for use in subsequent position control  
operations, the driving of the carriage motor is controlled by control signals generated from the main controller.  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Head relay PCB  
multi sensor  
Carriage relay PCB  
Sensor Flag  
Maintenance-jet tray  
Carriage cover  
sensor  
lift cam sensor  
F-2-12  
e) Printhead maintenance unit  
This printer cleans the printhead with the carriage halted at its home position.  
Wiping is executed in sync with the rotation of the motor. Wipers mounted on the carriage wipe the printhead  
while the carriage is halted at its home position.  
A maintenance jet is discharged as the carriage travels to pass the maintenance jet tray to the right of the plant.  
A suction operation is carried out by a suction cap in t he purge unit.  
f) Carriage height adjustment unit  
When the lift motor is driven to rotate the lift lever, the carriage shaft height is varied to change the separation  
between the face of the printhead and the paper.  
The printhead height is detected by the multisensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage  
g) Multisensor  
The multisensor attached to the lower left part of the carriage consists of four LEDs (red, blue, green, infrared)  
and two light-receiving sensors to detect the leading edges and width of paper and skews in it, and to adjust its  
registration and head height.  
The multisensor standard has a white plate attached to it, so that a reference value can be calculated during paper  
gap measurement by measuring the intensity of light reflected upon the white plate.  
(Service mode: SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB)  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
h) Rail cleaners  
The shaft cleaners located on both sides of the carriage clean the carriage shaft and give a coat of an imprenating  
oil to the shaft.  
i) Internal unit temperature sensor  
One thermistor is installed on the head relay PCB on the back of the head holder to detect the internal unit  
temperature.  
2.3.2.4 Printhead  
2.3.2.4.1 Structure of Printhead  
0013-6742  
A printhead incorporates six nozzle arrays. Each nozzle can be controlled individually so that a six-color  
discharge action can be performed by a single printhead.  
a) Nozzle arrays  
A total of 2560 nozzles are arranged in a two-column staggered pattern.  
In each column, 1280 nozzles are arranged in a staggered pattern at intervals of 600 dpi, forming a 2560-nozzle  
arranged at intervals of 1200 dpi.  
5/600inch  
1/1200inch  
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
2556  
2558  
2556  
2558  
2556  
2558  
2556  
2558  
2556  
2558  
2556  
2558  
2557  
2559  
2557  
2559  
2557  
2559  
2557  
2559  
2557  
2559  
2557  
2559  
82/600inch  
F-2-13  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
b) Nozzle structure  
Ink supplied from the ink tank is filtered by a mesh ink filter, and the supplied to the nozzles.  
Ink is supplied from the shared ink chamber to the nozzles. When the head driving current is applied to the  
nozzle heater, ink boils and form bubbles so that ink droplets are discharged from the nozzles.  
Resin  
Sillicon plate  
Heater  
Heater  
Shared ink chamber  
F-2-14  
2.3.2.5 Purge Unit  
2.3.2.5.1 Functions of Purge Unit  
0013-8022  
To maintain high print quality, the purge unit performs maintenance of the nozzles o the printhead.  
The purge unit supports a capping function, cleaning function, and ink supply function.  
a) Capping function  
The capping function presses the cap of the purge unit against the face plate on the nozzle section of the  
printhead to prevent nozzle drying and dust adhesion.  
Capping is performed when printing is complete, at the start of the suction operation, and when switching to the  
standby state due to an error.  
The capping function also establishes the ink passage between the printhead and purge unit.  
b) Cleaning function  
The cleaning function restores the printhead to the state where ink can be easily discharged from nozzles. This  
function includes the following three types of operations.  
- Wiping operation  
This operation is performed to remove paper fibers and dried ink from to the face plate.  
- Pumping operation  
This operation is performed to remove ink from the nozzles and fill the nozzles with fresh ink.  
- Maintenance jet operation  
This operation is performed to spray ink from the nozzles to the cap, borderless ink jet tray, an paper to remove  
bubbles in the nozzles and dust and other foreign particles.  
c) Ink supply function  
The suction pump of the purge unit operates together with the ink supply valve to supply ink to the printhead  
during the initial filling and ink level adjustment.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
Details of the cleaning function are shown in the table below.  
Name of Service mode or  
Cleaning  
PRINT INF  
Operation  
Normal cleaning  
Description of cleaning  
mode  
(Name of Main Menu)  
Cleaning 1 CLN-A-1/CLN-M-1  
(Head Cleaning A)  
Removes dried ink from nozzles, thick ink  
accumulated on the face, and paper particles.  
Cleaning 2 CLN-A-2  
Ink level adjustment and  
cleaning  
Adjust the ink level in the head by suction, and  
then performs normal cleaning.  
Cleaning 3 CLN-A-3  
Initial filling ink  
Fills the empty tube (during initial installation)  
with ink, and then performs normal cleaning.  
Cleaning 4 CLN-M-4  
(Replace P.head)  
Ink drainage for head  
replacement  
Drains ink to replace the head (drains only the  
ink in the head).  
Cleaning 5 CLN-M-5  
(Move Printer)  
Ink drainage for secondary  
transport  
Drains ink from the head and tube for  
secondary transport.  
Cleaning 6 CLN-A-6/CLN-M-6  
(Head Cleaning B)  
Normal (strong) cleaning  
Performs suction stronger than when adjusting  
the ink filling amount in the head or normal  
cleaning to unclog nozzles.  
Cleaning 7 CLN-A-7  
Aging  
Performs idle ejection after replacement of the  
head.  
Cleaning 10 CLN-A-10  
(Move Printer)  
Ink filling after secondary  
transport  
Fills the empty tube (during installation after  
secondary transport) with ink, and performs  
normal cleaning.  
Cleaning 11 CLN-A-11  
Cleaning 15 CLN-A-15  
Ink filling after head replacement Performs normal cleaning after head  
replacement and ink filling.  
Dot count suction  
Performs suction to remove ink adhered to  
dried nozzles and thick ink accumulated on the  
face when the dot count reaches the prescribed  
value.  
Cleaning 16 CLN-A-16  
Cleaning 17 CLN-A-17  
Precipitated ink agitation  
Cleaning (weak)  
Performs the agitation (ink supply valve open/  
close) operation to prevent the ink ingredient  
from precipitating.  
Performs cleaning weaker than normal  
cleaning to unclog nozzles.  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Cleaning operation timings are as follows.  
Consumption  
(typ.)*1  
Printer status  
Cleaning operation  
Standby 168 hours elapsed capped  
Cleaning 1 (Normal  
Cleaning)  
1g  
5g  
-
At least 720 to 960 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning Cleaning 6 (Normal  
2, 3, 6 or 10 (480 hours after initial installation) (strong) Cleaning)  
At initial installation and 96 hours elapsed since the last session of Cleaning 16  
Cleaning 16 (Precipitated ink  
agitation)  
1 hour elapsed capped with a specified number of dots discharged Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g  
per chip completed after last wiping  
Power-  
on  
At initial installation  
Cleaning 3 (initial filling 15g  
ink)  
Both heads and The print operation has 168 to 720 hours  
Cleaning 1 (Normal  
Cleaning)  
1g  
inks available  
completed.  
elapsed capped  
At least 720 to 960  
Cleaning 6 (Normal  
5g  
hours elapsed since the (strong) Cleaning)  
last session of Cleaning  
2, 3, 6 or 10 (360 to 480  
hours after initial  
installation)  
At least 960 to 2160  
Cleaning 2 (Ink level  
10g  
hours elapsed since the adjustment and  
last session of Cleaning cleaning)  
2, 3, 6 or 10 (480 hours  
after initial installation)  
At least 96 hours  
Cleaning 16  
-
elapsed since the last  
(Precipitated ink  
session of Cleaning 16 agitation)  
At least 1 hour elapsed Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g  
capped with a specified  
number of dots  
discharged per chip  
completed after last  
wiping  
Print operation aborted Up to 72 hours elapsed Cleaning 1 (Normal  
1g  
5g  
(uncapped) and CR  
error occurring  
after an abort  
Over 72 hours elapsed Cleaning 6 (Normal  
after an abort (strong) Cleaning)  
Cleaning)  
Print operation aborted (uncapped) and no CR  
error occurring  
Cleaning 11 (ink filling 10g  
after head replacement)  
No heads are available  
Cleaning 10 (ink filling 15g  
on secondary transport)  
Power  
off  
Specified number of dots discharged per chip completed since the Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g  
last session of wiping  
Before  
the start  
of  
Less than 168 hours elapsed capped  
At least 168 hours elapsed capped  
Idle ejection  
0.013g  
1g  
Cleaning 1 (Normal  
Cleaning)  
printing  
Before printing in the wake of an error occurrence  
Cleaning 1 (Normal  
Cleaning)  
1g  
Printing Before scanning while printing  
Idle ejection (+Wiping) - (0.013g)  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Consumption  
(typ.)*1  
Printer status  
Cleaning operation  
After the A specified number of dots (color) discharged per chip since the last Cleaning 6 (Normal  
5g  
end of  
session of Cleaning 2, 3, 6 or 1  
(strong) Cleaning)  
printing  
A specified number of dots discharged per chip after the last session Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g  
of wiping  
3 minutes elapsed since the last session of capping  
Wiping + Idle ejection 0.013g  
Total 2 hours elapsed uncapped since the last session of Cleaning 1, Cleaning 1 (Normal  
1g  
1g  
5g  
2, 3, 6 or 10  
Cleaning)  
Whenthe Manual Cleaning (Head Cleaning A)  
Head  
Cleaning 1 (Normal  
Cleaning)  
Cleaning  
menu  
choice is  
executed  
Manual cleaning (Head cleaning B)  
Cleaning 6 (Normal  
(strong) Cleaning)  
Whenthe After head replacement  
Replace  
Print  
Head  
menu  
Cleaning 2 (ink level  
adjustment and  
cleaning) + Cleaning 4  
(ink drainage for head  
replacement)  
10g  
choice is  
executed  
Whenthe After the Move Printer menu choice is executed  
Move  
Cleaning 5 (ink drainage 10g  
for secondary transport)  
Printer  
menu  
choice is  
executed  
After power-on at secondary installation  
After power-on at  
secondary installation  
15g  
*1: Quantities of ink consumption by nozzle train  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2.3.2.5.2 Structure of Purge Unit  
0013-8023  
Purge unit  
F-2-15  
a) Caps  
The caps cap the nozzle assembly in the printhead during cleaning. The part of the caps that comes into contact  
with the face plate of the nozzle assembly is made of rubber. Two caps are in position to meet the printhead  
mounted on the printhead (six trains of nozzles).  
These caps cap the nozzle assembly to suck inks from the printhead by means of the suction pump.  
The caps are elevated by the cap cam that is driven by the purge motor when the carriage moves to the home  
position, capping the nozzle assembly to protect it.  
Carriage lockpin  
Cap  
Pump cam sensor  
Glycerin tank  
Purge motor  
Pump encoder  
F-2-16  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
b) Wipers  
The wipers are driven by the purge motor to wipe the face of the printhead.  
A pair of two wiper blades are installed to ensure wiping performance.  
The wiping operation operates on a slide wiping basis, sliding the wiper blades via wiper cams through the  
rotation (normal) of the purge motor. Wiping is executed by the wiper blades moving at a constant speed to the  
front of the printer after the end of a print or suction operation.  
A wiper blade set perpendicularly to the head wipes the entire face of the printhead, followed by a narrower  
blade wiping the nozzle assembly.  
The wiper blades are cleaned after wiping before they are replaced at the wiping position to maintain wiping  
performance.  
Wiper blade cleaning is carried out by scraping off the inks that have been wipe off from the head with the ink  
scraper. The wiper blade is subjected to wet wiping, whereby it is pressed against an absorber impregnated with  
glycerin for added wiping removal performance. The quantity of glycerin used (tank capacity: 50 mL) is  
managed by counting the number of times the wiper blade has been pressed against the absorber. When this  
count falls to equal any of the following values, either a replacement warning (continued print available) or  
replacement required indication (service call error) is issued:  
T-2-4  
Advance notice of replacement  
Service call  
47,500times  
50,000times  
Ink scraper  
Printhead  
Glycerin absorbent material  
Glycerin tank  
Wiper blade  
Blade holder  
Wiper cam  
Cap  
F-2-17  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
c) Pump  
The pump (suction pump) is a tube pump that pressurizes the ink tubes with rotating rollers to generate a  
negative pressure for sucking inks.  
A single tube is sequentially pressurized by a pair of rotating rollers to control the level of ink suction. The  
timing at which the rotating rollers rotate is detected by the pump cam sensor, with the distance of rotation being  
controlled by the driving of the purge motor.  
Cap  
Suction pump  
Pump unit  
Pump cam sensor  
Cap  
Push rollers  
Ink tubes  
Purge motor  
Pump encoder  
To maintenance cartridge.  
F-2-18  
2.3.2.6 Maintenance Cartridge  
2.3.2.6.1 Maintenance Cartridge  
0013-7525  
a) Maintenance cartridge  
The maintenance cartridge holds about 1000 mL of used inks (about 867 g: including the evaporation of  
moisture from the used inks).  
b) Used maintenance cartridge ink detection  
Used maintenance cartridge ink detection is monitored with regard to a dot count.  
When the used ink reaches 80% of the cartridge capacity, the waning message "Maintenance C Space Check"  
is displayed to tell that the maintenance cartridge is nearly full.  
Further use of the maintenance cartridge will cause the appearance of the message "Replace Maintenance  
Cartridge" to report that the maintenance cartridge is full.  
When this error is displayed, the printer assumes that the used ink tank is full, shutting down its operation even  
while it is printing until the maintenance cartridge is replaced.  
The maintenance cartridge houses EEPROM, so that engine firmware can control the status of the maintenance  
cartridge by writing to and reading from the EEPROM content.  
F-2-19  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
2.3.2.7 Air Flow  
2.3.2.7.1 Air flow  
0012-6276  
This printer is furnished with two fans: a mist fan, which collects ink mist, and a platen fan, which allows paper  
to be adsorbed on the plate, and a platen fan.  
Ink mist floating during printing or bouncing back from the paper is collected in the maintenance cartridge by  
airflow in the printer.  
Airflow fans located on both sides of the printer, coupled with the suction fan in the middle of the printer, create  
airflow to carry the ink mist to the mist suction port.  
Suction of mist  
Waste ink BOX  
Suction of mist  
mist fan  
suction fan  
mist fan  
F-2-20  
2.3.3 Paper Path  
2.3.3.1 Outline  
2.3.3.1.1 Overview of Paper Path  
0013-8824  
The key components of the paper passage consist of a feed roller assembly, a pinch roller drive that locks and  
releases the pinch roller and sensors that detect the feed status of paper. It feeds paper in trays, conveys and  
delivers paper.  
Paper passage schematic diagram  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2  
Pinch roller  
Paper release lever  
Printhead  
Media  
Roll hlder  
Feed roller  
F-2-21  
Basic operation of the paper loading sequence  
1) Light intensity  
2) Detection of leading edge of media  
3) Paper width detection sensor  
Detects the left and right edges of paper.  
4) Barcode read  
*This function is operable only if the remaining roll media detection sensor is turned on.  
5) Ditection of leading skew of media.  
6) Ditection of leading right edge of media.  
7) Ditection of precut  
*When "precut" is only an automatic cutting, it does.  
8) Precut of media  
*In the following cases, the form point is cut.  
a. When "Up-to-date precut" is a compulsion cutting.  
b. When necessary having of cutting is judged from an automatic cutting, "Up-to-  
date precut" :.  
c. When "Roll paper remainder amount detection" is on, and the bar code is detected (Compulsorily cut  
it regardless of the setting of "Up-to-date precut").  
9) Detection of leading edge of media.  
Basic operations of the cut media loading sequence  
1) Paper trailing edge detection sensor  
2) Light intensity  
3) Detection of paper width  
4) Detection of skewed movement of paper  
MEMO:  
When offline, press the [ ] key to discharge the media and the [ ] key to rewind the media.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2.3.3.2 Paper Path  
2.3.3.2.1 Structure of Feed Roller Unit  
0017-  
a) Feed roller assembly  
The feed roller assembly consists mainly of a feed roller that is driven by the feed motor, a pinch roller unit that  
follows up the motion of the feed roller and so on.  
Paper is fed horizontally under the printhead on the carriage as it is kept level on the platen to prevent heaving.  
b) Sensors  
The feed roller assembly includes a feed status detection sensor and paper passage mechanical component status  
detection sensors.  
c) Roll media rewind drive unit  
The paper feed unit is provided with a roll media rewind drive to prevent paper from slacking during roll media  
feed. The rewind drive turns on the roll media rewinding clutch to rewind the roll media.  
The roll media rewinding clutch can be turned on only when the roll media is fed during the backward feed. The  
feed motor rotates the roll holder to rewind the roll media. During the forward feed, the roll media rewinding  
clutch is held off.  
Pinch roller  
Paper release lever  
Printhead  
Roll media  
Feed roller  
Roll holder  
Feed roller HP sensor  
Feed motor  
Feed roller encoder sensor  
Roll media rewinding clutch  
F-2-22  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
2.3.3.3 Cutter Unit  
2.3.3.3.1 Structure of the cutter unit  
0012-6289  
a) Sheet cutter  
When "Autocut: Yes" is selected in the Printer Driver, the cutter unit mounted on the left side of the carriage  
automatically cuts the roll media. However, the roll media is not cut if it is suppressed by the Printer driver.  
Cutter unit  
F-2-23  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
2.4 Printer Electrical System  
2.4.1 Outline  
2.4.1.1 Overview  
0012-6291  
The printer electrical system consists of the main controller PCB and power supply PCB which are mounted on  
the back side of the printer, the carriage relay PCB, the head relay PCB, and printhead which are mounted in the  
carriage, the operation panel on the right upper cover and other electrical components such as sensors, and  
motors.  
The main controller PCB manages the image data processing and the entire electrical system, and controls relay  
PCBs and driver functions.  
Carriage relay PCB  
Power supply PCB  
Main controller PCB  
Operation panel PCB  
Head relay PCB  
Maintenance cartridge relay PCB  
F-2-24  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2  
Power supply  
+26V generation function  
Main controller PCB  
IC1501/IC1701  
AC inlet  
IC1601-IC1603  
Power supply control function  
+21.5V generation function  
IC601/IC602  
IC603/IC604  
IC301/IC302  
SDRAM  
BAT801  
Lithium battery  
Multi sensor  
EEPROM  
Head  
IC803  
RTC  
IC802  
EEPROM  
EEPROM  
IC1  
Host computer  
Interface  
control function  
IC1201  
LAN Controller  
Linear encoder  
sensor  
Linear encoder detection function  
Heat pulse control function  
Image data control function  
Carriage relay PCB  
IC701 FLASH ROM  
IC2  
IC201  
DI sensor reading  
control function  
Operation panel  
Fans  
Temperature reading  
control function  
Operation panel control function  
PWM control function  
Thermistor  
Remaining ink level  
detection function  
Ink tank ROM PCB  
IC204/IC205  
Multi sensor  
control function  
Maintenance cartridge  
relay PCB  
LED control function  
IC1 EEPROM  
EEPROM control function  
Sensor detection function  
Solenoid/Clutch control function  
Motor control function  
Head relay PCB  
Sensors  
Solenoids/Clutches  
IC2802/IC2900  
IC2902/IC3100  
Motor driver  
Motors  
F-2-25  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2.4.2 Main Controller  
2.4.2.1 Main controller components  
0017-5107  
IC302 IC301  
IC803 IC802  
IC2900  
IC2902  
IC601  
IC602  
IC3100  
IC603  
IC604  
IC1 IC1201 BAT801 IC701 IC2  
IC2802  
F-2-26  
a) ASIC (IC1/IC2)  
The ASIC with a 16-bit internal bus is driven in sync with the 66 MHz external clock. It supports the following  
functions:  
Image processing unit  
This unit converts the RGB multi-value image data or CMYK multi-value data received from the host computer  
through the interface connector to the binary image data for the ink colors used.  
DMA controller  
This controller control DMA transfer of the data transferred through the input interfaces such as the USB and  
expansion card slot as well as DMA transfer of the data stored in the DIMM.  
Image data generation/output function  
This function generates image data for color printing from the received image data and the mask pattern  
(corresponding to print mode) stored in the FLASH ROM, and stored the generated image data in DIMM. It also  
outputs the generated image data to the carriage PCB.  
Interrupt controller  
This controller receives and processes internal interrupts and external interrupts from the USB, image  
processing unit, and expansion card slot.  
Timer function  
Even when the printer is turned off, the timer function is held on using the RTC(IC803) and lithium  
battery(BAT801) to assist the cleaning function.  
When the power cord is plugged to the outlet, power is supplied to the RTC and therefore the lithium battery  
power is not consumed.  
Heat Enable signal control function  
This function uses the pulse width to perform variable control of the time of application of the Heat Enable  
signal to the nozzle heater board for each printhead nozzle array.  
Linear scale count function  
This function reads the linear scale when the carriage moves, thus generating the ink discharge timing. It also  
counts the linear scale timing cycle using the reference clock to measure the carriage moving speed.  
Dot count function  
This function controls the discharge dots used as the information for Heat Enable signal control, maintenance  
jet control, cleaning control, and remaining ink level for each nozzle array.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
Operation panel control function  
This function controls serial communication with the operation panel.  
PWM control function  
This function controls driving of the suction fan and mist fan as well as the temperature of the printhead.  
Remaining ink level detection function  
This function detects the remaining level of each color of ink based on the signal received from the hollow  
needle mounted in the ink tank unit.  
LED control function  
This function controls the LEDs on the ink tank unit.  
I/O port function  
This function controls input signals from sensors.  
Power ON/OFF control function  
This function controls turning on/off of the drive power (26 V and 21.5 V) supplied from the power supply PCB.  
Head DI sensor read control function  
This function controls read operation by the head DI sensor.  
Multi sensor control function  
This function controls the LED, adjusts the gain, and controls obtainment of the reading for the multi sensor.  
EEPROM control function  
This function controls the EEPROMs of individual ink tanks, the maintenance cartridge EEPROM, the  
EEPROM on the maintenance cartridge relay PCB, and the head EEPROM in addition to the on-board  
EEPROM.  
Motor control function  
This function controls the carriage motor, feed motor, valve motor, lift motor and purge motor based on the input  
signals from sensors.  
b) Driver IC (IC3100)  
This IC generates a carriage motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.  
c) Driver IC (IC2802)  
This IC generates feed motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.  
d) Driver IC (IC2900)  
This IC generates purge motor and valve motor control signals based on the control signal from the ASIC.  
e) Driver IC (IC2902)  
This IC generates a lift motor control signal based on the control signal from the ASIC.  
f) DIMMs (IC301,IC302,IC601,IC602,IC603,IC604)  
The DIMM comprising a 128-MB DDR-SDRAM and a 128-MB SDR-SDRAM is connected to the 32-bit data  
bus to be used as a work area.  
During print data reception, it is also used as an image buffer.  
It cannot be expanded.  
g) FLASH ROM (IC701)  
A 16-MB flash ROM is connected to the 8-bit data bus to store the printer control program.  
h) EEPROM (IC802)  
The 128-KB EEPROM stores various setting values, adjustment values, log data, counter values related to the  
user/servicing.  
MEMO:  
After replacement of the main controller PCB, the printer must be started up in the service mode to take over  
the setting and adjustment values to the new PCB properly (the service mode will be switched to the PCB  
replacement mode automatically).  
2-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2.4.3 Carriage Relay PCB  
2.4.3.1 Carriage relay PCB components  
0017-5581  
IC302  
F-2-27  
a) Regulator IC (IC302)  
This IC generates power for the printhead heater.  
2.4.4 Head Relay PCB  
2.4.4.1 Head relay PCB components  
0012-6318  
IC204  
TH201  
IC201  
IC205  
F-2-28  
a) Latch IC (IC201)  
DI sensor read control function  
Obtains reading value of the DI sensor in the printhead and the head rank value for each color and outputs them  
to the main controller based on the control commands from the main controller.  
Environment temperature read control function  
Outputs the environment temperature detected by the thermistor on the head relay PCB to the main controller  
based on the control commands from the main controller.  
Relay function of the power to the logic components in the printhead  
Supplies the power to the logic components in the printhead based on the control commands from the main  
controller.  
b) Thermistor (TH201)  
The environment temperature surrounding the head relay PCB detected by this thermistor is output to the main  
controller through the carriage relay PCB.  
c) Multi sensor control IC (IC204, IC205)  
These IC's generates the LED control signals and makes gain adjustment for the multi sensor.  
2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2  
2.4.5 Maintenance Cartridge Relay PCB  
2.4.5.1 Maintenance cartridge relay PCB components  
0013-6972  
IC 1  
F-2-29  
a) EEPROM (IC1)  
The 128-KB EEPROM stores all information written in the EEPROM on the main controller PCB.  
2.4.6 Power Supply  
2.4.6.1 Power supply block diagram  
0013-6974  
AC inlet  
100V to 240V  
Operation panel  
POWER ON  
Main controller PCB  
Power supply  
DC power supply  
control circuit  
+32V  
Noize filter circuit  
generation circuit  
Transformer  
+5V/+3.3V  
+5.1V  
Rectifying circuit  
generation circuit  
generation circuit  
F-2-30  
The power supply converts AC voltages ranging from 100 V to 240 V from the AC inlet to DC voltages for  
driving the ICs, motor, and others.  
The voltage generator circuits include the +32 V generation circuit for driving motors, fans, and the +5.1V  
generator circuit for driving sensors, logic circuits.  
When in the power saving mode, the power supply cut outs the +32 V and the +5.1 V.  
Power ON/OFF operation is controlled by the main controller PCB. When the upper cover is open, the power  
supply cut outs only the +32V power to the carriage.  
2-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 2  
2.5 Detection Functions with Sensors  
2.5.1 Sensors for covers  
0012-6321  
Upper Cover lock switch(left)  
Upper cover lock switch(right)  
Ink tank cover switch  
F-2-31  
Upper cover lock switch  
The micro switch-based Upper cover lock switch detects the open/closed states of the upper cover.  
When the upper cover closes, the switch is pressed to detect the closed state of the cover.  
The printer has one sensor installed on the left and right sides each to prevent one-sided tightening of the upper  
cover.  
Ink tank cover switch  
The micro switch-based Ink tank cover switch detects the open/closed states of the ink tank cover.  
When the ink tank cover closes, the switch is pressed to detect the closed state of the cover.  
Memo:  
+26.5V is supplied from the power supply unit to drive the carriage motor and the feed motor while the top cover  
is closed.  
2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
2.5.2 Ink passage system  
0013-8100  
Head management sensor  
Purge unit  
Pump cam sensor  
Pump encoder sensor  
Valve open/closed detection sensor  
F-2-32  
Pump cam sensor  
As the cam rotates, it shields the sensor light of the photointerrupter-based pump cam sensor or allows it to be  
transmitted. The status of the purge unit, such as capped, suction, and wiping, is detected in a combat ion of the  
status of detection by the pump cam sensor and the control of purge motor rotation by the pump encoder sensor.  
Rotary flag  
Sensor  
- Carriage lock  
- Capping  
- Suction  
- Air passage valve open  
- Idle suction  
- Printing  
- Suction during printing  
- Wiping  
- Carriage lock  
- Air passage  
- Carriage move  
- Idle ejection  
- Idle suction  
F-2-33  
2-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
Pump encoder sensor  
The photointerrupter-based sensor reads slits in the encoder film of the purge motor and controls the amount of  
its rotation accordingly.  
Slits  
Sensor  
F-2-34  
Valve open/closed detection sensor  
The photointerrupter-based valve open/closed detection sensor detects the status of the valve cam.  
The sensor detects that the ink supply valve is open when the sensor light is shielded by a link interlocked with  
the valve cam.  
Ink detection sensor  
The ink detection sensor detects the presence or absence of the ink in an ink tank with respect to the status of  
continuity between two hollow needles.  
When the ink level in the tank falls to a point below the wall surrounding the hollow needles in the air passage,  
continuity with the hollow needle on the ink supply side is disrupted, causing the sensor to detect that is ink is  
out.  
Ink tank  
Wall  
Rubber plug  
Needle (ink supply)  
Needle(air passage)  
F-2-35  
Head management sensor  
The photo-transmission-type sensor detects that the printhead is discharging ink.  
The carriage moves to and stops at the detection positions for individual nozzle arrays. When the carriage is at  
a stop, nozzles discharge ink on after another.  
The sensor detects each nozzle due to the voltage change caused when ink discharged from the nozzle blocks  
the sensor light.  
Non-discharging nozzle detection is carried out at the following timings:  
- After the execution of Cleaning 1, Cleaning 2, Cleaning 3, Cleaning 6 or Cleaning 10  
- After the number of copies that has been set by the user menu choice Nozzle Check Frequency have been  
2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
printed  
If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles have been located in one session of non-discharging  
nozzle detection, the normal cleaning sequence is launched before a second session of non-discharging nozzle  
detection is conducted. If more than a specified number of non-discharging nozzles are located in the second  
session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the normal (High) cleaning session is launched before a third  
session of non-discharging nozzle detection is conducted.  
If 30 or more non-discharging nozzles and less than 100 non-discharging nozzles per train are located as a result  
of the third session of non-discharging nozzle detection, the print operation can resume after the message display  
as needed. If 100 or more non-discharging nozzles are located, a head replacement prompt message is  
displayed.  
Printhead  
Nozzle unit  
Head management  
sensor unit  
F-2-36  
2-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2.5.3 Carriage system  
0012-6325  
HeadrelayPCB  
multisensor  
Linear encoder sensor  
Carriage  
cover sensor  
Lift cam sensor  
F-2-37  
2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
Multisensor  
The photoreflector-based multisensor consists of four LEDs (red, blue, green, infrared) and two light-receiving  
sensors to detect the leading edges and width of paper and skews in it, and to adjust its registration, head height  
and calibration.  
At head height adjustment, the two light-receiving sensors detect infrared light reflected upon the paper to work  
out the head height form differences in its measurement.  
LED(blue) LED(green) LED(red)  
Infrared sensor  
Infrared LED  
Media  
Platen  
F-2-38  
Service mode: After SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB. has been carried out, pass paper to make  
sure that it is detected properly.  
Carriage cover sensor  
The photointerrupter-based carriage cover sensor detects the opening and closing of the carriage sensor.  
When the carriage cover is closed, the sensor light is shielded by the sensor arm, enabling the sensor to detect  
that the carriage cover is closed.  
Lift cam sensor  
A photointerrupter-based sensor. After the sensor light is shielded by the flag, the lift motor is driven by a  
predetermined number of pulses to regulate the separation between the printhead and platen automatically.  
Linear encoder sensor  
Mounted on the back of the carriage, the linear encoder detects the position of the carriage from a slit in the  
linear scale during its movement.  
Ambient temperature sensor  
The thermostat-based ambient temperature sensor mounted on the head relay PCB detects the ambient  
temperature to which the carriage is exposed.  
The resistance of the thermistor that varies as a function of temperature changes in the printer is transmitted the  
main controller via the carriage relay PCB.  
The ambient temperature is used to help calibrate the head temperature sensor and detect abnormal ambient  
temperatures.  
Head temperature sensor  
The head temperature sensor detects the temperature of the printhead.  
The printhead temperature is transmitted to the main controller via the carriage relay PCB.  
The printhead temperature is used to help control the head drive and detect abnormal printhead temperatures.  
2-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Printhead contact sensor  
The printhead contact sensor detects the status of printhead installation by electrical means.  
The sensor detects the status of contact from voltage changes in the flexible cables on the carriage side that come  
into contact with two terminals of the printhead with remote contact surfaces, the power terminals and GND  
terminal.  
2.5.4 Paper path system  
0012-6327  
Feed roller HP sensor  
Feed roller  
encoder sensor  
Media sensor  
F-2-39  
Media sensor  
The photoreflector-based media sensor detects the presence or absence of paper on the platen.  
The sensor detects the presence of paper when it receives sensor light reflected upon the paper.  
Feed roller HP sensor  
The feed roller HP sensor sets an LF eccentricity correction home position by detecting transitions from black  
(shielded) to white (transmitted), or a reference, in the scale in the code wheel.  
Feed roller encoder sensor  
The feed roller encoder sensor detects the carriage position from slits in the feed roller pulley as it is driven.  
2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3 INSTALLATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
3.1 Transporting the Printer  
3.1.1 Transporting the Printer  
3.1.1.1 Transporting the Printer  
0013-9654  
Do not remove the printhead once they are installed, as this may cause the nozzles to dry out or accumulate  
foreign matter. Also the head must be capped and stay in the carriage while transporting the printer. In spite of  
this precaution, shocks incurred during transportation can still damage the print heads. Print the "Nozzle Check"  
before moving the printer, print the "Nozzle Check" after installing in a new location, and compare the two  
printouts. If any deterioration is evident in the output quality, replace the printhead with new ones.  
This subsection describes how to transport the printer.  
When moving the printer to another place on the same floor of the building, move it slowly so that it does not  
receive any shocks. Follow the steps shown in "1. Moving the printer on the same floor".  
When moving it elsewhere, follow the steps shown in "2. How to transport the printer to a different floor".  
Always hold the carrying handles at the bottom of the printer when lifting and moving the printer. Holding the  
printer by its cover can deform the cover.  
Moving or transport operations where the printer needs to be temporarily tilted or stood upright must be  
performed by service personnel.  
1. Moving the printer on the same floor  
1) Turn off the [Power] button, and check that the heads are capped.  
2) Open the upper cover, and mount the belt stopper.  
When mounting the belt stopper, be careful not to move the carriage by applying too much pressure. If the  
carriage moves when the heads are capped, the rubber part of the cap may touch the nozzles on the heads and  
damage the printhead.  
3) Close the upper cover.  
4) Remove the roll holder from the roll holder slot.  
5) Remove the interface cable and power cord from the printer.  
6) If the printer is mounted on a stand, unlock the casters on the stand.  
7) Hold the printer carrying handle at the bottom, and then slowly move the printer.  
If the printer is subjected to strong vibrations when it is moved, it can cause ink leakage or damage to the  
printhead. Be sure to move the printer slowly and carefully.  
2. How to transport the printer to a different floor  
Follow the steps shown in a) When the printer is operating properly. When the printer is not operating properly  
due to breakdown or a power-supply problem, follow the steps shown in b) When the printer is not operating  
properly.  
a) When the printer is operating properly  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3  
To prevent the waste ink from leaking, drain the ink, and then remove the maintenance cartridge. Package the  
removed maintenance cartridge so that the waste ink does not leak from it.  
1) Turn on the [Power] button on the printer.  
2) Remove the roll holder from the roll holder slot.  
3) Enter the Main menu, and then select "Maintenance" > "Move Printer". Follow the instructions in the  
messages, and remove all of the ink tanks.  
Put the removed ink tanks in the plastic bag with the ink supply part upward and close the opening.  
It takes about 4 minutes to complete the "Move Printer" operation.  
- "Move Printer" cannot be selected when "MTCart Full Soon" is displayed.  
In this case, replace the maintenance cartridge first.  
- Never disconnect the power cord, or open the covers while the "Move Printer" operation is in progress since  
this can cancel the operation. If the "Move Printer" operation is canceled while in progress, the printer will  
remain in offline mode, and it will not switch to online mode. "Ink  
Filling" is performed when the power is turned back on after canceling so repeat "Move Printer" from the  
beginning.  
4) Once the "Move Printer" operation is completed, turn off the [Power] button.  
5) Open the upper cover, check that the heads are capped, and then use the belt stopper to secure the carriage in  
place. (PRODUCT DESCRIPTION > Safety and Precautions > Other Precautions > Handling the Printer >  
Fixing the carriage.)  
When mounting the belt stopper, be careful not to move the carriage by applying too much pressure. If the  
carriage moves when the heads are capped, the rubber part of the cap may touch the nozzles on the heads and  
damage the printhead.  
6) Close the upper cover.  
7) Disconnect the interface cable and power cord from the printer.  
8) Wait 15 minutes after "Move Printer" and then remove the maintenance cartridge and package them so that  
used ink does not leak from them.  
Check that used ink is no longer leaking after removing the maintenance cartridge. If it is leaking, install the  
maintenance cartridge and wait until leaking stops.  
9) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.  
10) If the printer is mounted on a stand, remove the printer from the stand.  
11) Pack the printer into the packing box, and then put the roll media, ink tank, and optional devices in another  
packing box for moving.  
Use the original packing material for the printer and optional devices. If it is not available, pack them with a  
sufficient amount of cushioning materials.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
b) When the printer is not operating properly  
1) Make sure that the printer is turned off.  
2) Disconnect the interface cable and power cord from the printer.  
3) Remove the roll holder from the roll holder slot.  
4) While referring to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Draining the Ink > Manual Ink Drainage, drain the  
ink from the printer.  
5) While referring to INSTALLATION > Transporting the Printer > Transporting the Printer> Manual Capping,  
perform the capping operation.  
6) Remove the maintenance cartridge, and then package it so that the waste ink does not leak from it.  
7) Attach all of the exterior covers  
8) Open the upper cover, and then use the belt stopper to secure the carriage in place. (Refer to PRODUCT  
DESCRIPTION > Safety and Precautions > Other Precautions > Handling the Printer > Fixing the carriage.)  
9) Close the upper cover.  
10) Attach the cushioning materials and tape.  
11) If the printer is mounted on a stand, remove the printer from the stand.  
12) Use the original packing material for the printer and optional devices. If it is not available, pack them with  
a sufficient amount of cushioning materials.  
3. Manual capping  
When transporting the printer, cap the Printhead to protect the nozzles from drying out and to keep them clean.  
Follow the procedures described below:  
1) While referring to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly >  
Opening the caps and releasing the carriage lock pins, open all of the caps.  
2) Move the carriage to the home position.  
3) While referring to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly >  
Opening the caps and releasing the carriage lock pins.  
Manual capping is an emergency measure when the printer does not operate. Manual capping can damage the  
printhead.  
Carriage unit  
Move until it comes to a stop.  
F-3-1  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
3.1.2 Reinstalling the Printer  
3.1.2.1 Reinstalling the Printer  
0012-6353  
1. Installing the printer on the same floor  
If ink has not been drained from the printer when moving it to another place on the same floor, then an operation  
check (Test Print) needs to be performed after the printer is moved to a new location.  
2. Installing the printer on a different floor  
If ink has been drained when transporting the printer to a different floor, follow the installation procedure below.  
It is nearly identical to the procedure when installing for the first time.  
1) Unpack the printer, and mount the printer on a stand if a stand is included.  
2) Remove the cushioning materials and tape.  
3) Reattach the maintenance cartridge.  
4) Remove the belt stopper.  
5) Connect the power cord.  
6) Turn on the power and following the instruction in the message to install the ink tank. The ink is filled.  
7) Load the media, and perform the operation check.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Contents  
4.1 Service Parts...................................................................................................... 4-1  
4.1.1 Service Parts............................................................................................................... 4-1  
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly................................................................................ 4-1  
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly......................................................................................... 4-1  
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly........................................ 4-3  
4.3.1 Note on locations prohibited from disassembly .................................................... 4-3  
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually.................................................................................. 4-3  
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink................................................................................... 4-3  
4.3.4 External Covers.......................................................................................................... 4-4  
4.3.5 Waste Ink Box........................................................................................................... 4-11  
4.3.6 Driving Unit................................................................................................................ 4-12  
4.3.7 Ink Tube Unit............................................................................................................. 4-13  
4.3.8 Carriage Unit............................................................................................................. 4-16  
4.3.9 Feeder Unit ............................................................................................................... 4-21  
4.3.10 Purge Unit ............................................................................................................... 4-22  
4.3.11 Ink Tank Unit........................................................................................................... 4-23  
4.3.12 Head Management Sensor................................................................................... 4-25  
4.3.13 Multi Sensor............................................................................................................ 4-26  
4.3.14 PCBs........................................................................................................................ 4-27  
4.3.15 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit............................................................ 4-28  
4.3.16 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve............................................................... 4-29  
4.3.17 Draining the Ink ...................................................................................................... 4-30  
4.4 Applying the Grease ....................................................................................... 4-31  
4.4.1 Applying the Grease................................................................................................ 4-31  
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items......................................................................... 4-33  
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List................................................................................................ 4-33  
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor .......................... 4-33  
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor .............................. 4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
4.1 Service Parts  
4.1.1 Service Parts  
0012-6354  
The service parts indicated below require careful handling.  
1. Keep all packages with the warning not to turn over.  
Pay careful attention to all individually packaged service part (carriage unit, purge unit, ink tank unit, and other  
parts) boxes marked "This side up" and handle appropriately.  
F-4-1  
4.2 Disassembly/Reassembly  
4.2.1 Disassembly/Reassembly  
0012-6355  
The general disassembly and assembly flows of the major components are shown below.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4  
F-4-2  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
4.3 Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly  
4.3.1 Note on locations prohibited from disassembly  
0012-6356  
Assemblies that are prohibited from disassembly and their adjustment outside the factory cannot be conducted  
are indicated by red screws.  
Don't never loosen or remove the red screw, because normal operation and print can't be done if it is loosened  
or removed.  
F-4-3  
4.3.2 Moving the carriage manually  
0012-6357  
Move the carriage as required during disassembly/reassembly to prevent the carriage form contacting the parts  
to be removed.  
The carriage does not move when capped. When uncapping moving the carriage, refer to the procedures in  
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY>Points to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly>Opening the Cap/Moving  
the Wiper Unit.  
4.3.3 Units requiring draining of ink  
0012-6359  
Before disassembling the units in the ink passage mentioned below, drain them of inks completely to prevent  
their leakage.  
For instructions on how to drain units of inks, see Disassembly/Reassembly > Tips on Disassembly/Reassembly  
> Ink Drainage.  
[1]Ink Tube Unit  
See Disassembly/Reassembly > Tips on Disassembly/Reassembly > Ink Tube Unit.  
[2]Carriage Unit/Head Holder  
See Disassembly/Reassembly > Tips on Disassembly/Reassembly > Carriage unit.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4  
[3]Ink Tank Unit  
See Disassembly/Reassembly > Tips on Disassembly/Reassembly > Ink Tank Unit.  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
F-4-4  
4.3.4 External Covers  
0012-6361  
a. Upper cover  
To detach the upper cover, detach damper cover [1] located on the left and right sides of the back each. Then,  
fully open the upper cover and slide it to left.  
[1]  
F-4-5  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
In attaching the upper cover, have the boss on damper [1] located on both sides into slit [2].  
If the upper cover is not attached in correct position, it would slam shut without the damper being activated.  
[2]  
[1]  
F-4-6  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
b. Right side and left side covers  
To detach a side cover, slide up side cover S [1] in the middle. Unscrew two screws[3] hidden under side  
cover S [1] and slide downside cover [2] to detach the slide cover.  
[2]  
[1]  
[3]  
F-4-7  
c. Operation panel  
To remove the operation panel, first open the top cover, insert your hand into the inside of the right upper  
cover from the left side and release two lower claws[2] securing operation panel [1] in position. Then, push  
out operation panel [1] to front to release it from upper three hooks. Then, remove the two connectors[3] from  
the back of operation panel [1] to which harnesses are attached.  
[1]  
[3]  
[2]  
F-4-8  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
d. Right upper cover  
To detach the right upper cover[1], first open the top cover, remove the operation panel, right cover lid and  
right side cover, and then unscrew the front-panel screws[2]. Next, pull the right side of the right upper cover  
to front and slide it down out of position by lifting up the upper left edge of the cover.  
[1]  
[2]  
F-4-9  
Take maximum care in reinstalling the right upper cover not to interfere with the harnesses connected to the  
operation panel.  
e. Ink tank cover  
To detach the ink tank cover[1], remove the right side cover, right upper cover and ink tank cover lid and  
unscrew the front-panel screws[2]. Next, detach the right cover by lifting it up as a whole.  
2
[2]  
1
[1]  
1
F-4-10  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
f. Front cover  
To detach the front cover[1], the right cover needs to be removed and the maintenance cartridge cover opened  
beforehand so the front cover can be slid to right to remove.  
To do this, unscrew the four front-panel screws[2] and remove two bottom claws[3], and slide the front cover  
to right. Then, pull out the upper eight hooks to front to detach the front cover.  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
F-4-11  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
g. Upper rear cover  
To detach the upper rear cover, first remove the top cover, the right rear cover and left front cover, left rear  
cover and paper release lever. Upper rear cover [1] has upper top claw [2] inserted into cover stay [3]. Rotate  
the upper edge of the upper rear cover about 90 degrees to detach it.  
Attach the upper rear cover with claw [2] at its upper edge into cover stay [3] first.  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
F-4-12  
h. Rear cover  
To detach rear cover [1], unscrew 12 screws[2] and remove the cover from the bottom side first.  
[1]  
[2]  
F-4-13  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
i. Paper release lever  
To remove paper release lever [1], do so with the pinch roller pressurized. In assembling paper release lever  
[1] into position, align the gear of paper release lever [1] with the mark on the receiving gear (phase) [2].  
[2]  
[1]  
[3]  
[4]  
[3]  
F-4-14  
If pinch roller cam [3] has been overrun when paper release lever [1] is installed, remove cam sensor [4] and  
replace pinch roller cam [3] in original position.  
If pinch roller cam [3] is replaced with cam sensor [4] in position, damage to cam sensor [4] could result.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
4.3.5 Waste Ink Box  
0013-8085  
a. Removing the waste ink box  
To remove the waste ink box, remove waste ink tray [1] from the back by unscrewing two screws[4]. Then,  
unscrew four screws[2] to remove waste ink box [3].  
[2]  
[3]  
[1]  
[4]  
F-4-15  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
4.3.6 Driving Unit  
0012-6365  
a. Timing belt (for driving the feed roller)  
To assemble the timing belt for driving the feed roller, loosen the tensioner setscrew and establish the tension  
of the timing belt by adjusting the spring pressure. When the timing belt is assembled back in position,  
tighten the tension with the setscrew.  
[3]  
[4]  
[1]  
[2]  
F-4-16  
b. Action following the replacement of the feed roller and feed roller encoder  
This printer as shipped has the feed roller eccentricity (that is, variations in the rate of paper feed from  
rotation to rotation) corrected for enhanced media feed accuracy. When the feed roller, feed roller HP sensor  
or feed roller encoder pertaining to the correction of eccentricity variations has been replaced or  
disassembled and reassembled, therefore, the feed roller should require adjustment.  
Execute service mode under the following conditions:  
Service mode SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING  
Media type: Gloss photo paper  
Paper size: 36 inches  
If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting "SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN >  
LF TUNING" (auto adjustment), carry out manual adjustment.  
Service mode SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2  
Media type: Gloss photo paper  
Paper size: 36 inches  
Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
4.3.7 Ink Tube Unit  
0012-6367  
a. Removing the ink tube unit  
(1) Drain the inks of printer. See "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Points to Note on Disassembly and  
Reassembly" > "Draining the Ink".  
(2) Turn off the printer and move the carriage to above the platen. See "Disassembly/Reassembly" >  
"Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Opening the Caps and Moving the Wiper Unit".  
(3) Remove the shaft cleaner and detach the tube holder cover.  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
F-4-17  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
(4) Disconnect three flexible cables from the main controller.  
(5) Remove the feed guide (right) that encloses the flexible cables extending from the main controller.  
(6) Disconnect all connectors from the carriage relay PCB.  
(7) Disconnect the joint between the ink tube unit and the ink tank unit.  
[1]  
F-4-18  
(8) Remove the printhead.  
(9) Remove printhead fixer lever [1].  
(10)Cover the joint of the ink tube unit in a plastic bag or the like to prevent ink splashing and leakage,  
and seal the mouth of the bag.  
F-4-19  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
(11)Release the cable cover from its claw away from the frame.  
(12)Unscrew one screw[2] and remove the cable clamp[1] from the frame.  
[2]  
[1]  
F-4-20  
(13)Release the ink tube unit from the carriage.  
b. Reassembling the ink tube unit  
When the ink unit has been replaced, turn on the power switch without the printhead and the ink tanks  
mounted. Then, mount the printhead and ink tanks as directed by message guidance to fill the tanks.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
4.3.8 Carriage Unit  
0012-6371  
a. Removing the carriage unit  
(1) Drain the printer of inks. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Tips on Disassembly/Reassembly > Ink  
Drain.  
(2) Switch off the printer and move the carriage to above the platen. See Disassembly/Reassembly >  
Tips on Disassembly/Reassembly > Open Cap/Shift Wiper Unit.  
(3) Remove the shaft cleaner, tube holder cover and tube holder.  
(4) Remove the printhead.  
(5) Disconnect all connectors from the carriage relay PCB.  
(6) Remove the printhead fixer lever assembly.  
(7) Cover the printhead-side joint of the ink tube unit in a plastic bag or the like to prevent ink splashing  
and leakage, and seal the mouth of the bag.  
F-4-21  
(8) Release the ink tube unit from the carriage.  
(9) Remove the pulley stand[3] and the feed roller plate[4], and release the carriage unit[1] from the left  
side of the printer.  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
F-4-22  
In removing the carriage unit, extract it level so that its protective mylar[2] sheets will not come off. If the  
protective mylar sheets should come off, the carriage unit rollers could come into contact with each other,  
rattling to or they could be damaged to degrade print quality.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
b. Installing the carriage belt  
Install the carriage belt[2] with its complete set of teeth engaged with carriage belt stopper[1].  
[1]  
[2]  
F-4-23  
c. Action following the replacement of the carriage unit/multi sensor  
Because the distance between the multisensor (in the carriage unit) and the nozzles (in the printhead) is varied  
from one unit to another, the printer as shipped has its optical axis corrected to adjust the image write  
position. When the carriage unit or multisensor has been replaced or disassembled and reassembled, they  
require adjustment.  
Execute service mode under the following conditions:  
* The multi sensor reference plate must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi  
sensor is being replaced.  
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.  
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS  
Media type : Photo glossy paper  
Media size : Media having a width equal toor larger then that of A2-size paper  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
d. Removing the head holder  
(1) Drain the printer of inks. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Tips on Disassembly/Reassembly > Ink  
Drain.  
(2) Switch off the printer and move the carriage to above the platen. See Disassembly/Reassembly >  
Tips on Disassembly/Reassembly > Open Cap/Shift Wiper Unit.  
(3) Remove the shaft cleaner, tube holder cover and tube holder.  
(4) Remove the printhead.  
(5) Disconnect all connectors from the carriage relay PCB.  
(6) Release the two flexible cables from the carriage claws (to prevent the elevation and defective  
contact of the flexible cable on the head holder side).  
(7) Remove the printhead fixer lever assembly.  
(8) Cover the printhead-side joint of the ink tube unit in a plastic bag or the like to prevent ink splashing  
and leakage, and seal the mouth of the bag.  
F-4-24  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
(9) To remove the head holder, press the lock pin located rearward to its left with a flat-blade screwdriver  
or similar object in the direction of the arrow mark.  
[1]  
[2]  
F-4-25  
2
1
F-4-26  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
e. Reassembling the head holder  
After the head holder has been reassembled, check that it lifts up and down in sync with the printhead height  
adjustment lever.  
[1]  
[2]  
F-4-27  
f. Multisensor correction  
Since multi sensors have individual electrical specificity, the following are recalibrated at the factory, namely,  
the optical axis of the sensor, the sensor gain for measuring the printhead height and sensor reproduction.  
Accordingly, carry out the following adjustments in the service mode whenever replacing the carriage unit or  
multi sensor.  
* The multi sensor reference plate must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi sensor  
is being replaced.  
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.  
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS  
Media type : Photo glossy paper  
Media size : Media having a width equal toor larger then that of A2-size paper  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
4.3.9 Feeder Unit  
0012-6372  
a. Handling the feed roller  
The feed roller is a functionally vital part. Observe these precautions when handling it:  
-Do not handle the feed roller with one hand or deflect it.  
-Do not touch the roller surface (coated side).  
-Do not flaw or dent the roller surface.  
-Hold the feed roller by two positions shown below: holding position A and one of holding positions B,  
C and D.  
A
B
C
D
F-4-28  
b. Action following the replacement of the feed roller  
This printer as shipped has the feed roller eccentricity (that is, variations in the rate of paper feed from  
rotation to rotation) corrected for enhanced media feed accuracy. When the feed roller, feed roller HP sensor  
or feed roller encoder pertaining to the correction of eccentricity variations has been replaced or when the  
feed roller has been replaced or disassembled and reassembled, therefore, the feed roller should require  
adjustment.  
Execute service mode under the following conditions:  
Service mode SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING  
Media type: Gloss photo paper  
Paper size: 36 inches  
If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting "SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN >  
LF TUNING" (auto adjustment), carry out manual adjustment.  
Service mode SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2  
Media type: Gloss photo paper  
Paper size: 36 inches  
Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
4.3.10 Purge Unit  
0012-6374  
b. Removing the purge unit  
(1) Switch off the printer and move the carriage to above the platen. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Points  
to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit.  
(2) Disconnect the ground wire from the side of the purge unit.  
(3) Remove the connector and release the harness from the harness guide.  
(4) Unscrew four screws[4] and remove the waste ink tube joint[2], and then remove the purge unit[1].  
[4]  
[1]  
[2]  
[3]  
[1]  
F-4-29  
-Install the purge unit with care not to let the waste ink tube[3] bent.  
-Exchange absorbents that exist under the purge unit at the same time when you exchange purge unit.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
4.3.11 Ink Tank Unit  
0012-6377  
a. Removing the ink tank unit  
(1) Drain the printer of inks. See Disassembly/Reassembly > Point to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly  
> Draining the Ink.  
(2) Remove the joint between the ink tube unit and the ink tank unit.  
(3) Remove the four screws[2], remove five connectors and two hooks[1], then remove the ink tank unit.  
[2]  
[1]  
F-4-30  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
b. Removing the valve motor unit  
(1) Remove four screws[2] and remove one screw, and then remove the valve motor unit[1].  
[2]  
[1]  
F-4-31  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
4.3.12 Head Management Sensor  
0012-6375  
a. Installing the head management sensor  
(1) Attach the connector[2] to the head management sensor[1] and then set the head management sensor[1]  
where it is to be mounted and fasten it with screw[3].  
[3]  
[1]  
[2]  
F-4-32  
b. Procedure after replacing the head management sensor  
The optical axis is compensated at factory shipment in order to adjust the non-discharge detection position  
because there are fluctuations among machines in the distance between the head management sensor and  
carriage unit. Therefore, adjustment must be made when the head management sensor is replaced or  
disassembling/assembling components that may cause error in the distance between the head management  
sensor and carriage unit.  
Enter the service mode as follows:  
SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS. > YES  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
4.3.13 Multi Sensor  
0013-6826  
a) Removing the multi sensor  
(1) The head holder is opened.  
See:  
"Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Points to Note on Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Carriage unit" > "d.  
Removing the head holder"  
(2) Remove the screw[1], disconnect the flexible cable[2], and then remove the multi sensor[3].  
[2]  
[3]  
[1]  
F-4-33  
Since multi sensors have individual electrical specificity, the following are recalibrated at the factory, namely,  
the optical axis of the sensor, the sensor gain for measuring the printhead height and color reproduction.  
Accordingly, carry out the following adjustments in the service mode whenever replacing the carriage unit or  
multi sensor.  
* The multi sensor reference plate must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi sensor  
is being replaced.  
* When replacing the carriage unit, refer to Adjustment and Setup > Procedure after Removing or  
Replacing the Carriage Unit.  
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.  
- Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS  
Media type : Photo glossy paper  
Media size : Media having a width equal toor larger then that of A1-size paper  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
4.3.14 PCBs  
0013-5637  
Do not replace the main controller PCB and maintenance cartridge relay PCB(ROM board) at the same time.  
These PCBs store important data such as settings and carriage drive time. Before replacement of enther PCB,  
the data stored in it is move to the other PCB through internal communication so that it can be taken over to the  
new PCB automatically. This is the reason whey the two PCBs should not be replaced at the same time.  
If you want to replace both PCBs at the same time, first carry out the procedure "a" and then carry out the  
procedure "b".  
After replacing whth the maintemance controller PCB or maintenance cartridge relay PCB which are supplied  
as service parts, check that the firmware to the latest version.  
a) Procedure for replacing the maintenance cartridge relay PCB(ROM board)  
1) Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.  
2) Replace the maintenance cartridge relay PCB.  
3) Plug the power cord to the outlet, and then turn on the printer whth the PAPER SOURCE button and  
INFORMATION button pressed down. (The printer will start up in the PCB Replacement mode.)  
4) Check that "Initializing" appears on the display, and then release the buttons. (When the printer enters the  
PCB Replacement mode, the message lamp goes on.)  
5) What until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.  
6) Select "MC BOARD", and then press the ok button  
7) Check that "TURN POWER OFF" appears on the display, and then turn off the printer.  
8) Turn on the printer.  
9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, update.  
b) Procedure for replacing the main controller PCB  
1) Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.  
2) Replace the main controller PCB.  
3) Plug the power cord to the outlet, and then turn on the printer whth the PAPER SOURCE button and  
INFORMATION button pressed down. (The printer will start up in the PCB Replacement mode.)  
4) Check that "Initializing" appears on the display, and then release the buttons. (When the printer enters the  
PCB Replacement mode, the message lamp goes on.)  
5) What until "REPLACE MODE" appears on the display.  
6) Select "CPU BOARD", and then press the ok button  
7) Check that "TURN POWER OFF" appears on the display, and then turn off the printer.  
8) Turn on the printer.  
9) Check the firmware version. If the firmware is not the latest version, update.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
4.3.15 Opening the Cap/Moving the Wiper Unit  
0013-9674  
The procedures for manually opening the caps and ink supply valves are presented below.  
The carriage lock pin and caps need to be released manually if moving the carriage when the power is turned off.  
1. Opening the caps and releasing the carriage lock pins  
1) Remove the right side cover, right rear cover, and right upper cover.  
2) Turn the gear[1] of the purge unit[3] in the direction of the arrow. The cap[5] and lock pin[4] move down,  
allowing you to move the carriage[2].  
[5]  
[4]  
[2]  
[3]  
[1]  
[3]  
F-4-34  
MEMO:  
After opening the caps and removing the carriage lock pin, rotating the gear further will close the caps after the  
wiper unit has completed the return movement, and the carriage lock pin will rise and lock the carriage.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
2. Moving the wiper unit  
1) Remove the right side cover, right rear cover, and right upper cover.  
2) To move the wiper unit[3], turn the gear[1] of the purge unit[2] in the direction of the arrow.  
[3]  
[2]  
[1]  
[2]  
F-4-35  
4.3.16 Opening/Closing the Ink Supply Valve  
0012-6384  
1) Remove the right side cover.  
2) To open the ink supply valve, turn the cam[2] in the direction of the arrow and press the link[1].  
- If the tube is full of ink, releasing the printhead lock lever with the ink supply valve open can cause the ink to  
flow back to the ink supply unit, resulting in leakage of ink from the ink supply needle.  
- If the ink supply valve is held open due to a problem such as a valve motor error(03130031-2F3A), remove  
the valve motor unit(refer to DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > Points to Note on Disassembly and  
Reassembly > Ink Tank Unit) and close the ink supply valve.  
[2]  
[1]  
F-4-36  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
4.3.17 Draining the Ink  
0012-6385  
There are two methods of removing the ink, using a manual method or automatic method.  
When the ink is drained, the ink inside the ink passage totaling about228g(about38g x 6colors) is drained as  
waste ink.  
To prevent ink leaks, be sure to always remove the ink inside the ink passage when disassembling or  
transporting the parts of the ink passage section.  
1. Automatic ink drainage  
Automatic ink drainage is performed by going to the Main Menu and selecting "Maintenance" > "Move Printer".  
It takes about 4 minutes for automatic ink drainage to be performed.  
Perform automatic ink drainage again if a power outage or other cause shuts off the power during the operation  
for automatic ink drainage.  
2. Manual ink drainage  
A syringe or other implement is used to remove the ink inside the ink passages one color at a time in the event  
of a printer electrical failure, firmware error, or malfunction in supplying power to the printer.  
Manual Ink Drainage Procedure  
(1) Remove ink tank cover. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Point to Note on Disassembly and  
Reassembly" > "External cover"  
(2) Move the carriage onto the platen. Refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Point to Note on Disassembly and  
Reassembly" > "Opening the Cap/Move the Wiper Unit".  
(3) Turn the cam[1] in the direction of the arrow, and then press the link[2] to open the ink supply valve.  
[2]  
[1]  
F-4-37  
4) Release both printhead fixer levers[1] to flow the ink from inside the ink tube to the sub-buffer of the ink tank  
unit.  
[1]  
F-4-38  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
4.4 Applying the Grease  
4.4.1 Applying the Grease  
0013-9975  
Apply the grease at the location shown below.  
Smear the grease lightly and evenly with a flat brush.  
Don't apply the grease to locations other than those designated. Unwanted grease may cause poor print quality,  
take particular care that grease does not get onto the wiper, cap, or the linear scale.  
Plate spring : Permalub G No.2  
approx. 12mg  
Cam : Permalub G No.2  
approx. 12mg  
Lock pin :  
Permalub G No.2 approx. 12mg  
Joint :  
Molykote PG-641 approx. 24mg  
F-4-39  
Permalube G No.2  
approx. 24mg  
F-4-40  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4  
Bearing  
Permalube G No.2  
approx. 24mg  
Feed roller  
Permalube G No.2  
approx. 24mg  
Feed roller  
Feed roller  
Permalube G No.2  
approx. 24mg  
F-4-41  
Permalube G No.2  
approx. 24mg  
F-4-42  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
4.5 Adjustment and Setup Items  
4.5.1 Adjustment Item List  
0017-5609  
The following adjustment procedures need to be performed when parts have been replaced or remove and then  
reinstalled:  
T-4-1  
Adjustment item  
Adjustment timing  
Multi sensor replacement/removal  
Carriage unit replacement/removal  
Feed roller  
Multi sensor recalibration  
Adjusting feed roller eccentricity  
Feed roller encoder  
Head management sensor recalibration  
Head management sensor replacement/  
removal  
Carriage unit replacement/removal  
4.5.2 Procedure after Replacing the Feed Roller or Feed Roller Encoder  
0013-9977  
Feed roller eccentricity is factory-adjusted (correction of variation in the paper feed amount per rotation). It is  
necessary to adjust feed roller eccentricity after replacing the feed roller or feed roller encoder.  
In the service mode, perform automatic adjustment of feed roller eccentricity.  
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING  
Media type : Photo glossy paper  
Media size : Media having awidth equal to or larger than that of A2-size paper  
If adjustment cannot be done properly by selecting "SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF  
TUNING" (auto adjustment), carry out manual adjustment.  
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > LF TUNING2  
Media type : Photo glossy paper  
Media size : Media having awidth equal to or larger than that of A2-size paper  
Check the printed pattern and enter values for adjustment.  
4.5.3 Procedure after Replacing the Carriage Unit or Multi Sensor  
0013-9980  
a) Multi Sensor Recalibration  
Since multi sensors have individual electrical specificity, the following are recalibrated at the factory, namely,  
the optical axis of the sensor, the sensor gain for measuring the printhead height and color reproduction.  
Accordingly, carry out the following adjustments in the service mode whenever replacing the carriage unit or  
multi sensor.  
The multi sensor reference plate must be replaced at the same time whenever the carriage or the multi  
sensor is being replaced.  
-Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > GAP CALIB.  
-Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > PRINT PATTERN > OPTICAL AXIS  
Media type : Photo glossy paper  
Media size : Media having a width equal toor larger then that of A2-size paper  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 4  
4.5.4 Procedure after Replacing the Head Management Sensor  
0012-6394  
Since the distance between the head management sensor and the carriage unit varies among printers, the optical  
axis is factory-adjusted to adjust the non-discharging detection position. When you have replaced the head  
management sensor or performed assembly/reassembly of surrounding parts that can change the distance  
between the head management sensor and the carriage unit, reasjustment is required  
Peform the readjustment in the service mode.  
Service mode : SERVICE MODE > ADJUST > NOZZLE CHK POS.  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Contents  
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts............................................................................ 5-1  
5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts..................................................................................... 5-1  
5.2 Consumable Parts............................................................................................. 5-1  
5.2.1 Consumable Parts ..................................................................................................... 5-1  
5.3 Periodic Maintenance....................................................................................... 5-2  
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance................................................................................................ 5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
5.1 Periodic Replacement Parts  
5.1.1 Periodic Replacement Parts  
0013-6993  
T-5-1  
Level  
Periodic Replacement part  
User  
None  
Service Personnel None  
5.2 Consumable Parts  
5.2.1 Consumable Parts  
0017-5585  
T-5-2  
Consumables  
Service Mode  
Life  
PARTS COUNTER  
Name  
Part number Q'ty sheets  
/A0  
States (Error Code)  
xx  
x
Service WASTE INK  
TANK UNIT  
QM3-1369-030 2  
12000 A1/A2  
A
OK/W1/E146-4001  
MIST FAN  
QL2-1053-000  
QC2-2999-000  
2
2
12000 A1/A2  
12000 A1/A2  
ABSORBER,  
DUCT  
BASE, MULTI  
SENSOR  
QL2-1738-000  
1
12000 A2  
REFERENCE  
CARRIAGE UNIT QM3-3330-000 1  
12000 D1/D2/  
D3  
D
OK/W1/W2  
SCALE, LINEAR QC2-2697-000  
1
12000 D2  
12000 F1  
12000 H1  
12000 K1  
TUBE UNIT  
QM3-3329-000 1  
F
OK/W1/W2  
PURGE UNIT  
QM3-1413-000 1  
QM3-1395-000 1  
H
K
OK/W1/E141-4046  
HEAD  
OK/W1/W2//E194-  
404A  
MANAGEMENT  
SENSOR UNIT  
MOTOR,  
QM3-1401-000 1  
12000 M1  
M
OK/W1/W2  
CARRIAGE  
User  
See "Product Overview> Features> Consumables"  
After supplies have been replaced, execute [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS xx] in service  
mode to initialize (clear) the parts counter information.  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 5  
5.3 Periodic Maintenance  
5.3.1 Periodic Maintenance  
0012-6400  
T-5-3  
Level  
Periodic maintenance  
User  
Cleaning of ink mist and other substances(about once each month  
None  
Service personnel  
a) Printer cleaning  
To keep up with print quality and prevent troubles, clean the printer about once each month.  
1) Using a damp cloth wringed well, wipe dirt and paper dust off the printer exterior, paper feed slot [1], and  
power plug. Next, rub them with a dry cloth.  
[1]  
F-5-1  
2) Press the [MENU] button to display the main menu.  
3) Press the  
4) Press the  
5) Press the  
and  
and  
and  
buttons to select [Maintenance] and then press the  
buttons to select [Platen Cleaning] and press the  
buttons to select [Yes] and press [OK] button.  
button.  
button.  
6) Open the top cover.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5  
7) If chad has deposited on suction port [1] on the platen or in borderless printing ink receiving channel [2], wipe  
it off with the cleaner brush [3].  
[2]  
[3]  
[1]  
F-5-2  
MEMO:  
Rinse the cleaner brush with water when it gets dirty.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
8) Using a damp cloth wringed well, wipe dirt off the inside of the top cover. Wipe ink contamination off the  
roller [1], overall surface of the platen [2], pinch roller unit [3], borderless print ink receiving groove [4],  
delivery guide [5], and guide rail [6].  
[3] [6]  
[5]  
[2]  
[4]  
[1]  
F-5-3  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
- Do not dry the interiors of the top cover with a dry cloth. Electrostatic charges could make the internal  
components susceptible to dirt, resulting in degraded print quality.  
- Do not use flammable solvents, such as thinner and benzine, on the printer. Solvents coming into contact with  
any electrical parts inside the printer could result in fires or electrical shock hazards.  
- Do not touch linear scale [1] and carriage shaft [2].  
[1]  
[2]  
F-5-4  
9) Remove the roll feed unit and fold plain paper two to three times and then insert through the printer rear into  
the underside of the pinch roller unit to wipe off dirt on the pinch roller unit.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Contents  
6.1 Troubleshooting................................................................................................. 6-1  
6.1.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................6-1  
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting.................................................................................................. 6-1  
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement ............................................. 6-2  
6.2.1 Main controller PCB................................................................................................... 6-2  
6.2.2 Carriage relay PCB.................................................................................................. 6-12  
6.2.3 Head relay PCB........................................................................................................ 6-19  
6.3 Version Up........................................................................................................ 6-24  
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................. 6-24  
6.4 Service Tools ................................................................................................... 6-25  
6.4.1 Tool List ..................................................................................................................... 6-25  
6.4.2 Using the Cover Switch Tool.................................................................................. 6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
6.1 Troubleshooting  
6.1.1 Outline  
6.1.1.1 Outline of Troubleshooting  
0013-1941  
1. Overview  
Targets of troubleshooting are classified into the troubles displayed on the LCD (i.e., warnings, errors, and  
service calls) and the troubles not displayed on the LCD.  
Warnings and errors are displayed on the printer's LCD along with a code comprising alphanumeric characters.  
2. Precautions for Troubleshooting  
1) Check the environmental conditions and the media used.  
2) Before starting troubleshooting, check that the connectors and cables are connected properly.  
3) If you repair the printer with its external panel detached without disconnecting the AC cord from the outlet,  
take great care to prevent electric shock and short-circuiting of PC boards.  
4) Countermeasures to take after completion of troubleshooting are described starting with the most probable  
component that can cause the trouble determined by troubleshooting. If there are two or more equally  
probable components, countermeasures are described starting with the component that requires the easiest  
repair. After performing each countermeasure step, carry out test printing to check whether the problem has  
been solved. If not solved, try the next countermeasure step.  
5) After completion of troubleshooting, check that all the necessary connectors and screws have been  
installed securely.  
6) After completion of replacement or repair of a component, be sure to carry out test printing to make sure  
that the trouble has been solved.  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 6  
6.2 Location of Connectors and Pin Arrangement  
6.2.1 Main controller PCB  
0017-5653  
J3401 J3602 J3601 J2501 J2601 J2503  
J1801  
J3101  
J3001  
J3004  
J2702  
J2703  
J2704  
J2701  
J2801  
J1001  
J3202 J3201 J2502 J3301  
F-6-1  
T-6-1  
J1001  
Pin  
Number  
Signal name  
IN/OUT Function  
IN USB VBUS (+5V)  
1
2
3
4
VBUS  
D-  
IN/OUT USB data (-)  
IN/OUT USB data (+)  
D+  
GND  
-
USB GND  
T-6-2  
J1801  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT Function  
Number  
1
AFCONT  
VM_ENB  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VM  
OUT  
Normal/power saving switch signal  
2
OUT  
-
VM enable signal  
GND  
3
4
-
GND  
5
IN  
IN  
-
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
GND  
6
VM  
7
GND  
8
GND  
-
GND  
9
GND  
-
GND  
10  
11  
12  
RGV20(+5V)  
RGV20(+5V)  
RGV20(+5V)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
Power supply (+5V)  
Power supply (+5V)  
Power supply (+5V)  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6  
T-6-3  
J2501  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PUMPM1_AM  
PUMPM1_AP  
GND  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Purge motor Drive signal AM  
Purge motor Drive signal AP  
GND  
PUMPR_ENCA  
SNS5V  
IN  
Pump encoder output signal A  
Power supply (+5V)  
OUT  
IN  
PUMPR_ENCB  
SNS3V  
Pump encoder output signal B  
Power supply (+3.3V)  
GND  
OUT  
-
GND  
/CONTROL_CAM_R IN  
Pump cam sensor output signal  
T-6-4  
J2502  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
INKBENM1_AM  
INKBENM1_AP  
SNS3V  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Valve motor drive signal AM  
Valve motor drive signal AP  
Power supply (+3.3V)  
GND  
2
3
4
GND  
5
/INKBEN_OPEN_R  
/TANKCOVER_R  
GND  
IN  
Valve open/close detection sencor output signal  
6
IN  
Ink tank cover switch output signal  
7
-
GND  
8
GND  
-
GND  
9
+5V  
OUT  
IN  
Power supply (+5V)  
Humidity sensor output signal  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
HUM  
GND  
-
TH  
IN  
Thermistor output signal  
GND  
GND  
-
/FUTO_ON  
+5V  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Head management sensor ON/OFF signal  
Power supply (+5V)  
Head management sensor ink detection signal  
/FUTO_CMP  
T-6-5  
J2503  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
GND  
-
GND  
/MEDIA_R  
IN  
Media sensor output signal  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J2503  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
3
MEDIA5V  
SNS3V  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Power supply (+5V)  
4
Power supply (+3.3V)  
GND  
5
GND  
6
/CRHP  
IN  
Lift cam sensor output signal  
Power supply (+32V)  
Lift motor Drive signal A  
Lift motor Drive signal AX  
Lift motor Drive signal B  
Lift motor Drive signal BX  
7
LIFTM_VM  
LIFTM0_A  
LIFTM2_AX_N0  
LIFTM1_B  
LIFTM3_BX_N1  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
8
9
10  
11  
T-6-6  
J2601  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
POWER_ON  
GND  
IN  
Power switch signal  
GND  
2
-
3
RGV20(+5V)  
BUZZER  
PDO  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Power supply (+5V)  
Buzzer control signal  
Panel IC control signal  
Power supply (+5V)  
Panel IC data signal  
N.C  
4
5
6
+5V  
7
PDI  
8
N.C.(HDD_LED)  
/PRESET  
GND  
9
OUT  
-
Panel reset signal  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
PCK  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
Panel IC clock signal  
Power supply (+5V)  
Panel IC chip select signal  
PANEL5V_ON  
/PCS  
T-6-7  
J2701  
Pin Number Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GND  
-
GND  
LFENCB  
LFENC_ON(+5V)  
LFENCA  
SNS3V  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
-
Feed roller encoder output signal B  
Power supply (+5V)  
Feed roller encoder output signal A  
Power supply (+3.3V)  
GND  
GND  
/LF_HP  
IN  
Feed roller HP sensor output signal  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
T-6-8  
J2702  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
VM 26V  
OUT  
OUT  
Power supply (+26V)  
Upper cover lock solenoid (L) drive signal  
DCOVER_SOL  
T-6-9  
J2703  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
3
VM 26V  
DCOVER_SOL  
N.C  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Power supply (+26V)  
Upper cover lock solenoid (R) drive signal  
N.C  
T-6-10  
J2704  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
VM_26V  
OUT  
Power supply (+26V)  
Suction fan alarm signal  
Suction fan duty control signal  
GND  
2
KYUINFAN_ALARM IN  
3
KYUINFAN_PWM  
GND  
OUT  
4
-
5
VM_26V  
OUT  
Power supply (+26V)  
Mist fan (R) alarm signal  
GND  
6
MISTFAN_R_ALARM IN  
7
GND  
-
8
VM_26V  
OUT  
Power supply (+26V)  
Mist fan (L) alarm signal  
GND  
9
MISTFAN_L_ALARM IN  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
GND  
-
VM_26V  
SPOOL_CL  
/ATUKAIJYO  
GND  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Power supply (+26V)  
Roll media rewinding cluch drive signal  
Pressure release switch output signal  
GND  
-
T-6-11  
J2801  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
LFSP_A  
OUT  
OUT  
Feed motor drive signal A  
Power supply (+32V)  
LFSP_VM  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J2801  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
3
4
5
6
LFSP_AB  
LFSP_BB  
LFSP_VM  
LFSP_B  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
Feed motor drive signal AB  
Feed motor drive signal BB  
Power supply (+32V)  
Feed motor drive signal B  
T-6-12  
J3001  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
VM  
-
OUT  
-
Power supply (+32V)  
-
T-6-13  
J3004  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
3
-
-
-
VM_CR  
N.C  
IN  
-
Upper cover lock switch output signal  
N.C  
T-6-14  
J3101  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
CRM_C  
CRM_B  
OUT  
OUT  
Carriage motor phase drive signal (C)  
Carriage motor phase drive signal (B)  
T-6-15  
J3201  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
3
4
5
6
TANK_CLK  
GND  
OUT  
Ink tank clock signal  
GND  
-
TANK_DAT2  
TANK_ON(+3.3V)  
TANK_DAT1  
TANK_DAT0  
IN/OUT  
OUT  
Ink tank data signal 2  
Power supply (+3.3V)  
Ink tank data signal 1  
Ink tank data signal 0  
IN/OUT  
IN/OUT  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J3201  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
7
GND  
-
GND  
8
INK_DETECT0  
INK_DETECT1  
INK_DETECT2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
Ink detection sensor output signal 0  
Ink detection sensor output signal 1  
Ink detection sensor output signal 2  
9
10  
T-6-16  
J3202  
Pin Number Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
1
TANK_CLK  
GND  
OUT  
Ink tank clock signal  
GND  
2
-
3
TANK_DAT8  
TANK_ON(+3.3V)  
TANK_DAT7  
TANK_DAT6  
GND  
IN/OUT  
Ink tank data signal 8  
Power supply (+3.3V)  
Ink tank data signal 7  
Ink tank data signal 6  
GND  
4
OUT  
5
IN/OUT  
6
IN/OUT  
7
-
8
INK_DETECT6  
INK_DETECT7  
INK_DETECT8  
N.C  
IN  
IN  
IN  
-
Ink detection sensor output signal 6  
Ink detection sensor output signal 7  
Ink detection sensor output signal 8  
N.C  
9
10  
11  
T-6-17  
J3301  
Pin Number Signal name  
IN/OUT  
IN/OUT  
IN/OUT  
-
Function  
1
2
3
4
5
MENT_SDA  
MENT_SCL  
GND  
Maintenance cartridge ROM control signal (data)  
Maintenance cartridge ROM control signal (clock)  
GND  
+3.3V  
OUT  
-
Power supply (+3.3V)  
N.C  
N.C  
T-6-18  
J3401  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
3
4
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
-
-
-
-
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J3401  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
5
VH_MONI1  
VH_ENB  
VH_MONI2  
GND  
IN  
VH control signal 1  
VH power supply ON/OFF signal  
VH control signal 2  
GND  
6
OUT  
IN  
7
8
-
9
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
GND  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Power supply (+3.3V)  
Power supply (+3.3V)  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
SNS5V  
SNS5V  
VM  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Power supply (+5V)  
Power supply (+5V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
GND  
VM  
VM  
VM  
VM  
VM  
VM  
VM  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
T-6-19  
J3601  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
GND  
-
GND  
2
H1-D-DATA-7-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 7(D)  
3
-
GND  
4
H1-E-HE-8_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 8(E)  
5
-
GND  
6
H1-E-DATA-8-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 8(E)  
7
-
GND  
8
H1-F-DATA-10-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 10(F)  
9
-
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
H1-E-DATA-9-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 9(E)  
-
GND  
H1-F-HE-10_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Head heat enable signal 10(F)  
GND  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J3601  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
H1-F-DATA-11-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Odd head data signal 11(F)  
GND  
H1-F-HE-11_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Head heat enable signal 11(F)  
GND  
H1-F-DATA-11-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Even head data signal 11(F)  
GND  
H1-F-DATA-10-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Even head data signal 10(F)  
GND  
H1-E-HE-9_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Head heat enable signal 9(E)  
GND  
H1-E-DATA-9-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Even head data signal 9(E)  
GND  
H1-B-DATA-2-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Odd head data signal 2(B)  
GND  
H1-B-DATA-3-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Odd head data signal 3(B)  
GND  
H1-C-HE-4_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Head heat enable signal 4(C)  
GND  
H1-C-DATA-4-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Odd head data signal 4(C)  
GND  
H1-B-HE-2_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Head heat enable signal 2(B)  
GND  
H1-A-DATA-1-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Odd head data signal 1(A)  
GND  
H1-A-DATA-0-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Odd head data signal 0(A)  
GND  
PWLED2_ON  
PWLED3_ON  
PWLED1_ON  
PWLED4_ON  
/CR_COVER  
VH_DIS  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Multi sensor LED2 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED3 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED1 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED4 drive signal  
Carriage cover sensor output signal  
VH selection signal  
Head data enable signal  
Power supply (+3V)  
Multi sensor signal 1  
Multi sensor signal 2  
GND  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
/OUT_ENB  
/H3V_ON_B  
MLT_SENS_1IN  
MLT_SENS_2IN  
GND  
IN  
-
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
T-6-20  
J3602  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
GND  
-
GND  
2
H1-E-DATA-8-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 8(E)  
3
-
GND  
4
H1-D-HE-7_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 7(D)  
5
-
GND  
6
H1-D-DATA-7-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 7(D)  
7
-
GND  
8
H1-D-DATA-6-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 6(D)  
9
-
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
H1-D-DATA-6-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 6(D)  
-
GND  
H1-D-HE-6_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 6(D)  
-
GND  
H1-C-HE-5_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 5(C)  
-
GND  
H1-C-DATA-5-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 5(C)  
-
GND  
H1_CLK_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head clock signal  
-
GND  
/H1_LT_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head latch signal  
-
GND  
H1-C-DATA-5-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 5(C)  
-
GND  
H1-B-HE-3_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 3(B)  
-
GND  
H1-C-DATA-4-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 4(C)  
-
GND  
H1-B-DATA-3-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 3(B)  
-
GND  
H1-B-DATA-2-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 2(B)  
-
GND  
H1-A-DATA-1-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 1(A)  
-
GND  
H1-A-HE-1_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 1(A)  
-
GND  
H1-A-DATA-0-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 0(A)  
-
GND  
H1-A-HE-0_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Head heat enable signal 0(A)  
GND  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J3602  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
/ENCODER_A  
/ENCODER_B  
H-DASH_LICC2_B  
H1-DASLK_LICC2  
H1-DLD_LICC2  
H1-DATA_LICC2  
H1-DSOUT2  
IN  
Carriage encoder output signal A  
Carriage encoder output signal B  
Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal  
Head analogue switch clock signal  
Head analogue switch latch signal  
Head analogue switch data signal  
Head temperature output signal 2  
Head temperature output signal 1  
Head ROM control signal (clock)  
Head ROM control signal (data)  
GND  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
H1-DSOUT1  
IN  
IO_ASIC_SCL_B  
IO_ASIC_SDA  
GND  
IN/OUT  
IN/OUT  
-
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
6.2.2 Carriage relay PCB  
0017-5656  
J101 J103  
J102  
J601  
J702  
J201 J202  
F-6-2  
T-6-21  
J101  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VM  
-
GND  
2
-
GND  
3
-
GND  
4
-
GND  
5
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+32V)  
Power supply (+5V)  
Power supply (+5V)  
GND  
6
VM  
7
VM  
8
VM  
9
VM  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
VM  
VM  
VM  
SNS5V  
SNS5V  
GND  
+3.3V  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Power supply (+3.3V)  
Power supply (+3.3V)  
GND  
+3.3V  
GND  
VH_MONI2  
VH_ENB  
VH_MONI1  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
IN  
VH control signal 2  
VH power supply ON/OFF signal  
VH control signal 1  
GND  
OUT  
IN  
-
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
T-6-22  
J102  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
GND  
-
GND  
2
H1-D-DATA-7-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 7(D)  
3
-
GND  
4
H1-E-HE-8_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 8(E)  
5
-
GND  
6
H1-E-DATA-8-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 8(E)  
7
-
GND  
8
H1-F-DATA-10-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 10(F)  
9
-
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
H1-E-DATA-9-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 9(E)  
-
GND  
H1-F-HE-10_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 10(F)  
-
GND  
H1-F-DATA-11-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 11(F)  
-
GND  
H1-F-HE-11_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 11(F)  
-
GND  
H1-F-DATA-11-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 11(F)  
-
GND  
H1-F-DATA-10-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 10(F)  
-
GND  
H1-E-HE-9_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 9(E)  
-
GND  
H1-E-DATA-9-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 9(E)  
-
GND  
H1-B-DATA-2-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 2(B)  
-
GND  
H1-B-DATA-3-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 3(B)  
-
GND  
H1-C-HE-4_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 4(C)  
-
GND  
H1-C-DATA-4-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 4(C)  
-
GND  
H1-B-HE-2_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 2(B)  
-
GND  
H1-A-DATA-1-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 1(A)  
-
GND  
H1-A-DATA-0-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Odd head data signal 0(A)  
GND  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J102  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
PWLED2_ON  
PWLED3_ON  
PWLED1_ON  
PWLED4_ON  
/CR_COVER  
VH_DIS  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Multi sensor LED2 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED3 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED1 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED4 drive signal  
Carriage cover sensor output signal  
VH selection signal  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
/OUT_ENB  
Head data enable signal  
Power supply (+3V)  
/H3V_ON_B  
MLT_SENS_1IN  
MLT_SENS_2IN  
GND  
Multi sensor signal 1  
IN  
Multi sensor signal 2  
-
GND  
T-6-23  
J103  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
GND  
-
GND  
2
H1-E-DATA-8-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 8(E)  
3
-
GND  
4
H1-D-HE-7_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 7(D)  
5
-
GND  
6
H1-D-DATA-7-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 7(D)  
7
-
GND  
8
H1-D-DATA-6-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
Even head data signal 6(D)  
9
-
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
H1-D-DATA-6-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 6(D)  
-
GND  
H1-D-HE-6_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 6(D)  
-
GND  
H1-C-HE-5_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 5(C)  
-
GND  
H1-C-DATA-5-OD_B  
GND  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 5(C)  
-
GND  
H1_CLK_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head clock signal  
GND  
-
/H1_LT_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head latch signal  
GND  
-
H1-C-DATA-5-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Even head data signal 5(C)  
GND  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J103  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
H1-B-HE-3_B  
GND  
OUT  
Head heat enable signal 3(B)  
GND  
-
H1-C-DATA-4-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Even head data signal 4(C)  
GND  
H1-B-DATA-3-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Even head data signal 3(B)  
GND  
H1-B-DATA-2-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Even head data signal 2(B)  
GND  
H1-A-DATA-1-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Even head data signal 1(A)  
GND  
H1-A-HE-1_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Head heat enable signal 1(A)  
GND  
H1-A-DATA-0-EV_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Even head data signal 0(A)  
GND  
H1-A-HE-0_B  
GND  
OUT  
-
Head heat enable signal 0(A)  
GND  
/ENCODER_A  
/ENCODER_B  
H-DASH_LICC2_B  
H1-DASLK_LICC2  
H1-DLD_LICC2  
H1-DATA_LICC2  
H1-DSOUT2  
H1-DSOUT1  
IO_ASIC_SCL_B  
IO_ASIC_SDA  
GND  
IN  
Carriage encoder output signal A  
Carriage encoder output signal B  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal  
Head analogue switch clock signal  
Head analogue switch latch signal  
Head analogue switch data signal  
Head temperature output signal 2  
Head temperature output signal 1  
Head ROM control signal (clock)  
Head ROM control signal (data)  
GND  
IN  
IN/OUT  
IN/OUT  
-
T-6-24  
J201  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
3
4
5
/CRENCA  
SNS5V  
/CRENCB  
GND  
IN  
Linear encoder output signal A  
Power supply (+5V)  
Linear encoder output signal B  
GND  
OUT  
IN  
-
N.C  
-
N.C  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
T-6-25  
J202  
Pin  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
Number  
1
2
3
+3.3V  
OUT  
-
Power supply (+3.3V)  
GND  
GND  
/CR_COVER  
IN  
Carriage cover sensor output signal  
T-6-26  
J601  
Pin Number Signal name  
IN/OUT  
-
Function  
1
GND  
GND  
2
VHT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Head transistor drive power supply  
VH feed back voltage +  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
GND  
3
VH_FB  
VH2  
4
5
VH2  
6
VH2  
7
VH2  
8
VH2  
9
VH2  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VH1  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
VH feed back voltage -  
GND  
VH1  
VH1  
VH1  
VH1  
VH1  
VH1_FB  
GND  
GND  
-
GND  
H3V  
OUT  
-
Power supply (+3V)  
GND  
GND  
PWLED4  
PWLED3  
PWLED2  
PWLED1  
VMGND  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Multi sensor LED 4 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED 3 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED 2 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED 1 drive signal  
GND  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
T-6-27  
J702  
Pin Number  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
IN  
Function  
1
MLT_SNS_2IN  
MLT_SNS_1IN  
H1-C-DATA-4-OD  
/H1-C-HE-4  
Multi sensor signal 2  
2
IN  
Multi sensor signal 1  
3
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
Odd head data signal 4(C)  
Head heat enable signal 4(C)  
Odd head data signal 3(B)  
Odd head data signal 2(B)  
Head heat enable signal 2(B)  
Odd head data signal 1(A)  
Odd head data signal 0(A)  
Head heat enable signal 0(A)  
Even head data signal 0(A)  
Even head data signal 1(A)  
Head heat enable signal 1(A)  
Even head data signal 2(B)  
Even head data signal 3(B)  
Head heat enable signal 3(B)  
Even head data signal 4(C)  
Head latch signal  
4
5
H1-B-DATA-3-OD  
H1-B-DATA-2-OD  
/H1-B-HE-2  
6
7
8
H1-A-DATA-1-OD  
H1-A-DATA-0-OD  
/H1-A-HE-0  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
H1-A-DATA-0-EV  
H1-A-DATA-1-EV  
/H1-A-HE-1  
H1-B-DATA-2-EV  
H1-B-DATA-3-EV  
/H1-B-HE-3  
H1-C-DATA-4-EV  
/H1_LT  
H1-C-DATA-5-EV  
/H1-C-HE-5  
Even head data signal 5(C)  
Head heat enable signal 5(C)  
Odd head data signal 5(C)  
Head clock signal  
H1-C-DATA-5-OD  
H1_CLK  
H1-D-DATA-7-OD  
H1-D-DATA-6-OD  
/H1-D-HE-6  
Odd head data signal 7(D)  
Odd head data signal 6(D)  
Head heat enable signal 6(D)  
Even head data signal 6(D)  
Even head data signal 7(D)  
Head heat enable signal 7(D)  
Even head data signal 8(E)  
Even head data signal 9(E)  
Head heat enable signal 9(E)  
Even head data signal 10(F)  
Even head data signal 11(F)  
Head heat enable signal 11(F)  
Odd head data signal 11(F)  
Odd head data signal 10(F)  
Head heat enable signal 10(F)  
Odd head data signal 9(E)  
Odd head data signal 8(E)  
H1-D-DATA-6-EV  
H1-D-DATA-7-EV  
/H1-D-HE-7  
H1-E-DATA-8-EV  
H1-E-DATA-9-EV  
/H1-E-HE-9  
H1-F-DATA-10-EV  
H1-F-DATA-11-EV  
/H1-F-HE-11  
H1-F-DATA-11-OD  
H1-F-DATA-10-OD  
/H1-F-HE-10  
H1-E-DATA-9-OD  
H1-E-DATA-8-OD  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J702  
Pin Number  
Signal name  
/H1-E-HE-8  
IN/OUT  
OUT  
-
Function  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
Head heat enable signal 8(E)  
GND  
GND  
H1_DSOUT1  
H1_DSOUT2  
H1-DLD_LICC2  
H1-DATA-LICC2  
H1-DASLK_LICC2  
H1-DASH_LICC2  
SNS5V  
IN  
Head temperature output signal 1  
Head temperature output signal 2  
Head analogue switch latch signal  
Head analogue switch data signal  
Head analogue switch clock signal  
Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal  
Power supply (+5V)  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN/OUT  
IN/OUT  
IO-ASIC_SDA  
IO-ASIC_SCL  
Head ROM control signal (data)  
Head ROM control signal (clock)  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
6.2.3 Head relay PCB  
0017-5657  
J101  
J102  
J201  
J601  
F-6-3  
T-6-28  
J101  
Pin Number  
Signal name  
VMGND  
PWLED1  
PWLED2  
PWLED3  
PWLED4  
VMGND  
H3V  
IN/OUT  
Function  
1
-
GND  
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
-
Multi sensor LED1 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED2 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED3 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED4 drive signal  
GND  
3
4
5
6
7
IN  
-
Power supply (+3V)  
GND  
8
GND  
9
GND  
-
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
VH1_FB  
VH1  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
-
VH feed back voltage -  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
GND  
VH1  
VH1  
VH1  
VH1  
VH1  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VMGND  
VH2  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
-
GND  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
Power supply  
VH feed back voltage +  
VH2  
VH2  
VH2  
VH2  
VH2  
VH_FB  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
J101  
Pin Number  
Signal name  
VHT  
IN/OUT  
Function  
29  
30  
IN  
-
Head transistor drive power supply  
GND  
GND  
T-6-29  
J102  
Pin Number  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
IN/OUT  
IN/OUT  
IN  
Function  
1
IO-ASIC_SCL  
IO-ASIC_SDA  
SNS5V  
Head ROM control signal (clock)  
Head ROM control signal (data)  
Power supply (+5V)  
2
3
4
H1-DASH_LICC2  
H1-DASLK_LICC2  
H1-DATA-LICC2  
H1-DLD_LICC2  
H1_DSOUT2  
IN  
Head analogue switch A/D trigger signal  
Head analogue switch clock signal  
Head analogue switch data signal  
Head analogue switch latch signal  
Head temperature output signal 2  
Head temperature output signal 1  
GND  
5
IN  
6
IN  
7
IN  
8
OUT  
OUT  
-
9
H1_DSOUT1  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
GND  
/H1-E-HE-8  
IN  
Head heat enable signal 8(E)  
Odd head data signal 8(E)  
Odd head data signal 9(E)  
Head heat enable signal 10(F)  
Odd head data signal 10(F)  
Odd head data signal 11(F)  
Head heat enable signal 11(F)  
Even head data signal 11(F)  
Even head data signal 10(F)  
Head heat enable signal 9(E)  
Even head data signal 9(E)  
Even head data signal 8(E)  
Head heat enable signal 7(D)  
Even head data signal 7(D)  
Even head data signal 6(D)  
Head heat enable signal 6(D)  
Odd head data signal 6(D)  
Odd head data signal 7(D)  
Head clock signal  
H1-E-DATA-8-OD  
H1-E-DATA-9-OD  
/H1-F-HE-10  
IN  
IN  
IN  
H1-F-DATA-10-OD  
H1-F-DATA-11-OD  
/H1-F-HE-11  
IN  
IN  
IN  
H1-F-DATA-11-EV  
H1-F-DATA-10-EV  
/H1-E-HE-9  
IN  
IN  
IN  
H1-E-DATA-9-EV  
H1-E-DATA-8-EV  
/H1-D-HE-7  
IN  
IN  
IN  
H1-D-DATA-7-EV  
H1-D-DATA-6-EV  
/H1-D-HE-6  
IN  
IN  
IN  
H1-D-DATA-6-OD  
H1-D-DATA-7-OD  
H1_CLK  
IN  
IN  
IN  
H1-C-DATA-5-OD  
/H1-C-HE-5  
IN  
Odd head data signal 5(C)  
Head heat enable signal 5(C)  
Even head data signal 5(C)  
Head latch signal  
IN  
H1-C-DATA-5-EV  
/H1_LT  
IN  
IN  
H1-C-DATA-4-EV  
IN  
Even head data signal 4(C)  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J102  
Pin Number  
Signal name  
IN/OUT  
IN  
Function  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
/H1-B-HE-3  
Head heat enable signal 3(B)  
Even head data signal 3(B)  
Even head data signal 2(B)  
Head heat enable signal 1(A)  
Even head data signal 1(A)  
Even head data signal 0(A)  
Head heat enable signal 0(A)  
Odd head data signal 0(A)  
Odd head data signal 1(A)  
Head heat enable signal 2(B)  
Odd head data signal 2(B)  
Odd head data signal 3(B)  
Head heat enable signal 4(C)  
Odd head data signal 4(C)  
Multi sensor signal 1  
H1-B-DATA-3-EV  
H1-B-DATA-2-EV  
/H1-A-HE-1  
IN  
IN  
IN  
H1-A-DATA-1-EV  
H1-A-DATA-0-EV  
/H1-A-HE-0  
IN  
IN  
IN  
H1-A-DATA-0-OD  
H1-A-DATA-1-OD  
/H1-B-HE-2  
IN  
IN  
IN  
H1-B-DATA-2-OD  
H1-B-DATA-3-OD  
/H1-C-HE-4  
IN  
IN  
IN  
H1-C-DATA-4-OD  
MLT_SNS_1IN  
MLT_SNS_2IN  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
Multi sensor signal 2  
T-6-30  
J201  
Pin Number Signal name  
IN/OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Function  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PWLED1  
PWLED2  
PWLED3  
PWLED4  
GND  
Multi sensor LED1 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED2 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED3 drive signal  
Multi sensor LED4 drive signal  
GND  
MLT_SNS_1  
MLT_SNS_2  
+5V  
IN  
Multi sensor signal 1  
IN  
Multi sensor signal 2  
OUT  
Power supply (+5V)  
T-6-31  
J601  
Pin Number Signal name  
IN/OUT  
OUT  
Function  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VH2  
Power supply  
VH2  
OUT  
Power supply  
VH2  
OUT  
Power supply  
VHT12  
OUT  
Head transistor drive power supply  
Even head data signal 10(F)  
Head ROM control signal (data)  
Head ROM control signal (clock)  
H1-F-DATA-10-EV  
IO_ASIC_SDA  
IO_ASIC_SCL  
OUT  
IN/OUT  
IN/OUT  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J601  
Pin Number Signal name  
IN/OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Function  
8
H3V_1  
Power supply (+3V)  
9
H1-C-DIA1  
/H1-A-HE-1  
VH1  
Head DI sensor signal 1(C)  
Head heat enable signal 1(A)  
Power supply  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
VH1  
Power supply  
VH1  
Power supply  
VH2  
Power supply  
VH2  
Power supply  
H1-E-DATA-9-OD  
/H1-F-HE-11  
H1-E-DIA1  
H1-D-DIA1  
H3V_1  
Odd head data signal 9(E)  
Head heat enable signal 11(F)  
Head DI sensor signal 1(E)  
Head DI sensor signal 1(D)  
Power supply (+3V)  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
H3V_1  
Power supply (+3V)  
H1-B-DATA-3-EV  
H1-A-DATA-0-EV  
/H1-B-HE-2  
VH1  
Even head data signal 3(B)  
Even head data signal 0(A)  
Head heat enable signal 2(B)  
Power supply  
VH1  
Power supply  
H1-D-DIA2  
/H1-E-HE-8  
H1-E-DIA2  
H1-F-DIA2  
Head DI sensor signal 2(D)  
Head heat enable signal 8(E)  
Head DI sensor signal 2(E)  
Head DI sensor signal 2(F)  
Head heat enable signal 9(E)  
Even head data signal 7(D)  
Head heat enable signal 6(D)  
Odd head data signal 5(C)  
Even head data signal 4(C)  
Even head data signal 1(A)  
Head DI sensor signal 2(A)  
Head DI sensor signal 2(B)  
Head heat enable signal 4(C)  
Odd head data signal 7(D)  
Odd head data signal 8(E)  
Head heat enable signal 10(F)  
Even head data signal 11(F)  
Even head data signal 8(E)  
Even head data signal 6(D)  
Head DI sensor signal 2(C)  
Even head data signal 5(C)  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
/H1-E-HE-9  
H1-D-DATA-7-EV  
H1-D-HE-6  
H1-C-DATA-5-OD  
H1-C-DATA-4-EV  
H1-A-DATA-1-EV  
H1-A-DIA2  
H1-B-DIA2  
/H1-C-HE-4  
H1-D-DATA-7-OD  
H1-E-DATA-8-OD  
/H1-F-HE-10  
H1-F-DATA-11-EV  
H1-E-DATA-8-EV  
H1-D-DATA-6-EV  
H1-C-DIA2  
H1-C-DATA-5-EV  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
J601  
Pin Number Signal name  
IN/OUT  
Function  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
H1-B-DIA1  
/H1-A-HE-0  
H1-B-DATA-2-OD  
H1-B-DATA-3-OD  
H1-C-DATA-4-OD  
GND  
IN  
Head DI sensor signal 1(B)  
Head heat enable signal 0(A)  
Odd head data signal 2(B)  
Odd head data signal 3(B)  
Odd head data signal 4(C)  
GND  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
-
GND  
-
GND  
GND  
-
GND  
H1-F-DATA-11-OD  
H1-E-DATA-9-EV  
GND  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Odd head data signal 11(F)  
Even head data signal 9(E)  
GND  
H1-D-DATA-6-OD  
/H1-C-HE-5  
/H1-B-HE-3  
H1-A-DIA1  
H1-A-DATA-1-OD  
GND  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Odd head data signal 6(D)  
Head heat enable signal 5(C)  
Head heat enable signal 3(B)  
Head DI sensor signal 1(A)  
Odd head data signal 1(A)  
GND  
OUT  
-
GND  
-
GND  
GND  
-
GND  
GND  
-
GND  
H1-F-DATA-10-OD  
H1-F-DIA1  
/H1-D-HE-7  
GND  
OUT  
IN  
Odd head data signal 10(F)  
Head DI sensor signal 1(F)  
Head heat enable signal 7(D)  
GND  
OUT  
-
H1_CLK  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
-
Head clock signal  
Head latch signal  
Even head data signal 2(B)  
Odd head data signal 0(A)  
GND  
/H1_LT  
H1-B-DATA-2-EV  
H1-A-DATA-0-OD  
GND  
GND  
-
GND  
GND  
-
GND  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
6.3 Version Up  
6.3.1 Firmware Update Tool  
0013-6639  
Use of the following tools allows you to update the firmware of the main controller incorporated in the printer.  
- GARO Firmware Update Tool  
- L Printer Service Tool  
1. GARO Firmware Update Tool  
GARO Firmware Update Tool is the same as that for user.  
Procedure:  
1) Start CARO Firmware Update Tool.  
2) Place the printer in the online mode.  
3) Transfer the firmware data to the printer according to the instructions shown on the display.  
4) The data shown on the LCD on the operation panel changes and the firmware is updated automatically.  
5) When firmware update is completed, the printer will start again.  
File transfer route:  
USB, IEEE1394, network  
2. L Printer Service Tool  
Procedure:  
1) Start L Printer Service Tool.  
2) Place the printer in the online mode.  
3) Specify the firmware file(jdl) and then transfer it.  
4) The data shown on the LCD on the operation panel changes and the firmware is updated automatically.  
5) When firmware update is completed, the printer will start again.  
File transfer route:  
USB, IEEE1394, network  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6  
6.4 Service Tools  
6.4.1 Tool List  
0013-7528  
T-6-32  
General-purpose tools  
Application  
Long phillips scerewdriver  
Phillips scerewdriver  
Flat-head screwdriver  
Needle-nose pliers  
Hex key wrench  
Inserting and removing screw  
Inserting and removing screw  
Removing the E-ring  
Inserting and removing the spring parts  
Inserting and removing hexagonal screws  
Applying grease  
Flat brush  
Lint free paper  
Wiping off ink  
Rubber gloves  
Preventing ink stains  
T-6-33  
Special-purpose tools  
Application  
Grease MOLYKOTE PG-641  
(CK-0562-000)  
Applying to specified locations  
Grease PERMALUBE G-2  
(CK-0551-020)  
Applying to specified locations  
Pressing the cover switch  
Cover Switch Tool  
(QY9-0103-000)  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6  
6.4.2 Using the Cover Switch Tool  
0012-6423  
Use the cover switch tool[1] by inserting the hook into the cover switch.  
[1]  
[1]  
F-6-4  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7 SERVICE MODE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Contents  
7.1 Service Mode..................................................................................................... 7-1  
7.1.1 Service Mode Operation ........................................................................................... 7-1  
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode.......................................................................................... 7-2  
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode.......................................................................................... 7-10  
7.1.4 Sample Printout........................................................................................................ 7-27  
7.2 Special Mode ................................................................................................... 7-32  
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing................................................................................... 7-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
7.1 Service Mode  
7.1.1 Service Mode Operation  
0013-7777  
a) How to enter the Service mode  
Enter the Service mode following the procedure below.  
1) Turn off the printer.  
2) Turn on the printer while holding down the [Paper Source] button and [Information] button.  
* Keep pressing the above buttons until "Initializing" appears on the display.  
3) "S" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display showing the version.  
4) After display of "Online", pressing the [Menu] button displays the SERVICE MODE top menu and the  
MESSAGE LED flashes.  
* The Service mode is added to the options in the Main menu. The Service mode can be entered even in the error  
status (when an error message is shown on the display) by turning the power off and then using the above key  
operation.  
b) How to exit the Service mode  
Turn off the printer.  
c) Key operation in the service mode  
- Selecting menus and parameters: [ ] or [ ] button  
- Going to the next lower-level menu: [ ] button  
- Going to the next higher-level menu: [ ] key  
- Determining a selected menu or parameter: [OK] button  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7  
7.1.2 Map of the Service Mode  
0013-7787  
The hierarchy of menus and parameters in the Service mode is shown below.  
T-7-1  
First Level Second Level  
Third Level  
YES/NO  
Fourth Level Fifth Level  
DISPLAY  
PRINTINF  
SYSTEM  
: Select YES to  
execute print  
S/N  
TYPE  
LF TYPE  
TMP  
SIZE LF  
SIZE LF  
SIZE CR  
SIZE CR  
S/N  
HEAD  
INK  
LOT  
C
---  
BK  
WARNING  
ERROR  
1
---  
20  
1
---  
20  
INK CHECK 000000  
I/O DISPLAY 1  
I/O  
DISPLAY  
I/O DISPLAY 2  
ADJUST  
PRINT  
PATTERN  
NOZZLE 1  
: Press the [OK]  
button to execute  
NOZZLE 2  
: Press the [OK]  
button to execute  
NOZZLE 3  
: Press the [OK]  
button to execute  
OPTICAL AXIS  
LF TUNING  
: Press the [OK]  
button to execute  
: Press the [OK]  
button to execute  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7  
First Level Second Level  
Third Level  
Fourth Level Fifth Level  
LF TUNING 2  
: Press the [OK]  
button to execute  
SENSOR CHECK  
HEAD ADJ.  
MANUAL HEAD DETAIL  
ADJ  
: Press the  
[OK] button  
to execute  
BASIC  
: Press the  
[OK] button  
to execute  
ADJ. SETTING  
A
A-1  
:
Adjustme  
nt value  
entry  
---  
A-24  
:
Adjustme  
nt value  
entry  
---  
F
F-1  
:
Adjustme  
nt value  
entry  
SAVE  
YES/NO  
SETTINGS  
RESET SETTINGS YES/NO  
NOZZLE CHK YES/NO  
POS.  
GAP CALIB. YES/NO  
CHANGE LF 0/1  
TYPE  
REPLACE CUTTER  
YES/NO  
T-7-2  
First Level  
Second Level  
PRINTER  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
COUNTER  
LIFE TTL  
LIFE ROLL  
LIFE CUTSHEET  
LIFE A  
---  
LIFE F  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
POWER ON  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
W-INK  
CUTTER  
WIPE  
CARRIAGE  
PURGE  
PRINT  
CR COUNT  
CR DIST.  
PRINT COUNT  
CLN-A-1  
CLN-A-2  
CLN-A-3  
CLN-A-6  
CLN-A-7  
CLN-A-10  
CLN-A-11  
CLN-A-15  
CLN-A-16  
CLN-A-17  
CLN-A-TTL  
CLN-M-1  
CLN-M-4  
CLN-M-5  
CLN-M-6  
CLN-M-TTL  
CLR-INK CONSUME  
CLR-CUTTER EXC.  
CLR-MTC EXC.  
CLR-HEAD EXC.  
CLR-UNIT A EXC.  
CLR-UNIT D EXC.  
CLR-UNIT F EXC.  
CLR-UNIT H EXC.  
CLR-UNIT K EXC.  
CLR-UNIT M EXC.  
CLR-FACTORY CNT.  
CLEAR  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
T-7-3  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
CUTTER EXC.  
MTC EXC.  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
COUNTER  
EXCHANGE  
HEAD EXC.  
BOARD EXC.(M/B)  
UNIT A EXC.  
UNIT D EXC.  
UNIT F EXC.  
UNIT H EXC.  
UNIT K EXC.  
UNIT M EXC.  
MOVE PRINTER  
N-INK CHK(C)  
---  
DETAIL-CNT  
INK-USE1  
N-INK CHK(BK)  
MEDIACONFIG-CNT  
INK-USE1(C)  
---  
INK-USE1(BK)  
INK-USE1(TTL)  
N-INK-USE1(C)  
---  
N-INK-USE1(BK)  
N-INK-USE1(TTL)  
INK-USE2(C)  
---  
INK-USE2  
INK-USE2(BK)  
INK-USE2(TTL)  
N-INK-USE2(C)  
---  
N-INK-USE2(BK)  
N-INK-USE2(TTL)  
INK-EXC(C)  
---  
INK-EXC  
INK-EXC(BK)  
INK-EXC(TTL)  
N-INK-EXC(C)  
---  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
First Level  
Second Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
N-INK-EXC(BK)  
N-INK-EXC(TTL)  
Fourth Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
Fifth Level  
T-7-4  
First Level  
Third Level  
NAME  
COUNTER  
MEDIA 1  
TTL  
TTL  
ROLL  
ROLL  
CUTSHEET  
CUTSHEET  
---  
MEDIA 7  
NAME  
TTL  
TTL  
ROLL  
ROLL  
CUTSHEET  
CUTSHEET  
MEDIA OTHER NAME  
TTL  
TTL  
ROLL  
ROLL  
CUTSHEET  
CUTSHEET  
P-SQ 36-44  
P-SQ 36-44  
P-SQ 24-36  
P-SQ 24-36  
P-SQ 17-24  
P-SQ 17-24  
P-SQ -17  
MEDIASIZE1  
ROLL  
P-SQ -17  
P-CNT 36-44  
P-CNT 24-36  
P-CNT 17-24  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
P-CNT -17  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
MEDIASIZE2  
ROLL  
D-SQ 36-44  
D-SQ 36-44  
D-SQ 24-36  
D-SQ 24-36  
D-SQ 17-24  
D-SQ 17-24  
D-SQ -17  
D-SQ -17  
D-CNT 36-44  
D-CNT 24-36  
D-CNT 17-24  
D-CNT -17  
P-SQ 36-44  
P-SQ 36-44  
P-SQ 24-36  
P-SQ 24-36  
P-SQ 17-24  
P-SQ 17-24  
P-SQ -17  
MEDIASIZE1  
CUT  
P-SQ -17  
P-CNT 36-44  
P-CNT 24-36  
P-CNT 17-24  
P-CNT -17  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
T-7-5  
First Level  
Second Level  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
COUNTER  
MEDIASIZE2  
CUT  
D-SQ 36-44  
D-SQ 36-44  
D-SQ 24-36  
D-SQ 24-36  
D-SQ 17-24  
D-SQ 17-24  
D-SQ -17  
D-SQ -17  
D-CNT 36-44  
D-CNT 24-36  
D-CNT 17-24  
D-CNT -17  
C
HEAD DOT CNT.  
1
---  
BK  
TTL  
HEAD DOT CNT.  
2
C
---  
BK  
TTL  
PARTS CNT.  
COUNTER A  
OK/W1/W2/E  
PARTS A1  
1:00  
2:00  
3:00  
4:00  
---  
COUNTER M  
OK/W1/W2/E  
PARTS M1  
1:00  
2:00  
3:00  
4:00  
SETTING  
Pth  
ON/OFF  
DATE  
TIME  
RTC  
XXXX/XX/XX : Date entry  
XX:XX : Time entry  
PV AUTO JUDGE ON/PFF  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
First Level  
Second Level  
WARNIG  
Third Level  
Fourth Level  
Fifth Level  
INITIALIZE  
: Press the [OK] button  
to clear  
ERROR  
: Press the [OK] button  
to clear  
ADJUST  
W-INK  
: Press the [OK] button  
to clear  
: Press the [OK] button  
to clear  
PURGE  
: Press the [OK] button  
to clear  
INK-USE CNT  
: Press the [OK] button  
to clear  
CUTTER-CHG  
CNT  
: Press the [OK] button  
to clear  
W-INK-CHG CNT : Press the [OK] button  
to clear  
HEAD-CHG CNT : Press the [OK] button  
to clear  
PARTS-CHG CNT PARTS A1  
: Press the [OK]  
button to clear  
---  
PARTS M1  
: Press the [OK]  
button to clear  
PARTS  
COUNTER  
PARTS A1  
: Press the [OK]  
button to clear  
---  
PARTS M1  
: Press the [OK]  
button to clear  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
7.1.3 Details of Service Mode  
0013-7791  
This section provides details of the Service mode menu.  
a) DISPLAY  
Displays and prints the printer information.  
1) PRINF INF  
Prints adjustment values in the User menu, [DISPLAY] and [COUNTER] parameters on A4-size or lager paper.  
When a roll media is used, the layout is optimized according to the media width.  
2) SYSTEM  
Displays the printer information shown below.  
T-7-6  
Display  
S/N  
Description  
Unit  
Serial number of printer  
-
-
TYPE  
Type setting on main controller PCB  
* iPF710/700 is represented by 36.  
LF TYPE Feed roller type: 0 or 1  
TMP Ambient temperature  
-
degrees  
C
SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media (feed direction)  
0 is always detected for the roll media.  
mm  
SIZE LF Detected size of loaded media (feed direction)  
0 is always detected for the roll media.  
inch  
SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction)  
SIZE CR Detected size of loaded media (carriage scan direction)  
mm  
inch  
3) HEAD  
Displays the following EEPROM information of the printhead.  
T-7-7  
Display  
S/N  
LOT  
Description  
Serial number of printhead  
Lot number of printhead  
4) INK  
Displays the numbers of days passed since installation of the following ink tanks.  
T-7-8  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
BK  
Number of days passed since the BK ink tank was installed  
Day(s  
)
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
MBK  
Number of days passed since the MBK ink tank was installed  
Day(s  
)
MBK2 Number of days passed since the MBK2 ink tank was installed  
Day(s  
)
C
Number of days passed since the C ink tank was installed  
Number of days passed since the M ink tank was installed  
Number of days passed since the Y ink tank was installed  
Day(s  
)
M
Y
Day(s  
)
Day(s  
)
5) WARNING  
Displays the warning history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.  
6) ERROR  
Displays the error history (up to 20 events). The newest event has the smallest history number.  
7) INK CHECK  
Displays the history of execution of turning off the remaining ink level detection (by using the refilled ink tank)  
in the order of C, M, Y, MBK, MBK, BK.  
0: No execution  
1: Executed at least once  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
b) I/O DISPLAY  
The information of each sensor and switch is shown in the display.  
Sensor and switch status is shown in the display.  
ON=1 OFF or not used=0  
ON = 1  
OFF or not used = 0  
Screen 1  
T-7-9  
I
/
O
0
D
0
I
S
0
P
0
L
0
A
0
Y
0
1
0
Upper row  
Lower row  
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (Display position)  
Screen 2  
T-7-10  
I
/
O
0
D
0
I
S
0
P
0
L
0
A
0
Y
0
2
0
Upper row  
Lower row  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (Display position)  
Screens 1 and 2 are selectable with the [ ] and [ ] buttons.  
These screens display the associated sensor status as listed in the table below.  
T-7-11  
Display  
position  
Sensor name  
Pump Cam Sensor  
LCD display contents  
0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Valve Open/Closed Detection Sensor  
(Not Used)  
0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF  
0
(Not Used)  
0
(Not Used)  
0
(Not Used)  
0
Feed Roller HP Sensor  
Upper Cover Lock Switch(L/R)  
Carriage Cover Sensor  
Ink Tank Cover Switch  
(Not Used)  
0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF  
0: Cover open , 1: Cover close  
0: Cover open , 1: Cover close  
10  
11  
12  
0: Cover open , 1: Cover close  
0
0
(Not Used)  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Display  
position  
Sensor name  
LCD display contents  
13  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Lift Cam Sensor  
0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF  
Pressure Release Switch  
0: Pinch Roller Unit open , 1: Pinch Roller Unit  
close  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
Media Sensor  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
(Not Used)  
0: Sensor ON , 1: Sensor OFF  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
c) ADJUST  
Performs adjustments and prints the adjustment and check patterns necessary for adjusting the printer parts.  
1) PRINT PATTERN  
T-7-12  
Display  
NOZZLE 1  
Description  
Prints the nozzle check pattern by single direction/ single pass without using the  
non-discharging back up.  
It is used to check for the non-discharging nozzles.  
- Media size: A4  
- Media type: any  
NOZZLE 2  
NOZZLE 3  
Print a 100% solid print pattern (used to check the ink reaction that cannot be  
checked with "NOZZLE 1") in the single path direction. Use this method when  
checking blocked nozzles.  
- Use paper with a height equal to or longer than that of A4-sized paper (in portrait  
orientation).  
- Any media type is acceptable.  
Print a 100% solid print pattern (used to check the ink reaction that cannot be  
checked with "NOZZLE 1") in the single path direction. Use this method when  
checking blocked nozzles. (The print drive control method is different from that for  
"NOZZLE 2".)  
- Use paper with a height equal to or longer than that of A4-sized paper (in portrait  
orientation).  
- Any media type is acceptable.  
OPTICAL AXIS  
LF TUNING  
Prints the pattern and adjusts the optical axis of the multi sensor.  
For details, refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" >  
"Procedure after replacing the carriage unit or multi sensor".  
- Media type: photo glossy paper  
Carry out automatic correction of eccentricity of the feed roller. For more details,  
refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure  
after replacing the feed roller and reed roller encoder".  
- The media type is "gloss photo paper".  
LF TUNING 2  
SENSOR CHECK  
Carry out manual correction of eccentricity of the feed roller. For more details,  
refer to "Disassembly/Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure  
after replacing the feed roller and reed roller encoder".  
- The media type is "gloss photo paper".  
* For Factory  
SENSOR CHECK are intended for factory adjustment purposes.  
No adjustment by service personnel is required.  
2) HEAD ADJ.  
Set or initialize the registration adjustment values of each printheads.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
T-7-13  
Display  
Description  
Prints the detail patterns for the manual head adjustment.  
MANUAL  
DETAIL  
HEAD ADJ  
After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the  
printed patterns and input the set values.  
BASIC  
Prints the basic patterns for the manual head adjustment.  
After printing, the mode will change to [ADJ. SETTING]. Check the  
printed patterns and input the set values.  
ADJ.  
SETTING  
A to F A-1 to F-1 This mode is to input the registration adjustment values.  
It is possible to return the values to the former one by printing the status  
print before changing the value.  
SAVE SETTINGS Save the registration adjustment values that has been input.  
RESET SETTINGS  
Initialize the registration adjustment values (to 0).  
3) NOZZLE CHK POS.  
This mode for adjusting the optical axis of the head management sensor. For details, refer to "Disassembly/  
Reassembly" > "Adjustment and Setup Items" > "Procedure after replacing the head management sensor".  
4) GAP CLIB.  
This mode measures the gap between the printhead and media by multi sensor and corrects the calibration value.  
5) CHANGE LF TYPE  
Change the type of the feed roller.  
0: Old feed roller  
1: New feed roller  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
d) REPLACE  
1) CUTTER  
This mode is for replacing the cutter unit.  
e) COUNTER  
Displays the life (operation frequency and time) of each unit, print counts for each media type, and else.  
The count values can be printed from [PRINT INF].  
1) PRINTER: Counters related to product life  
T-7-14  
Display  
LIFE TTL  
LIFE ROLL  
Description  
Unit  
sheets  
sheets  
sheets  
sheets  
Hours  
%
Cumulative number of printed media (equivalent of A4)  
Cumulative number of printed roll media (equivalent of A4)  
LIFE CUTSHEET Cumulative number of printed cut sheets (equivalent to A4)  
LIFE A-F  
POWER ON  
W-INK  
Cumulative number of printed media for environments A to F  
Cumulative power-on time (excluding the sleep time)  
Remaining capacity of the maintenance cartridge  
Number of cutting operations (count as 1 by moving back and forth)  
Number of wiping operations  
CUTTER  
WIPE  
Times  
Times  
2) CARRIAGE: Counters related to carriage unit  
T-7-15  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
PRINT  
Cumulative printing time  
Hours  
Times  
Times  
Times  
CR COUNT  
CR DIST.  
Cumulative carriage scan count (count as 1 by moving back and forth)  
Cumulative carriage scan distance (count as 1 by moving 210mm)  
Cumulative print end count (count as 1 by capping)  
PRINT COUNT  
3) PURGE: Counters related to purge unit  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
T-7-16  
Display  
CLN-A-1  
Description  
Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations  
Unit  
Times  
CLN-A-2  
CLN-A-3  
CLN-A-6  
CLN-A-7  
CLN-A-10  
Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 2 (ink level adjusting) operations Times  
Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 3 (initial filling) operations Times  
Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 6 (strong normal suction) operations Times  
Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 7 (aging) operations  
Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 10 (ink filling after secondary  
transportation) operations  
Times  
Times  
Times  
Times  
CLN-A-11  
CLN-A-15  
CLN-A-16  
Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 11 (ink filling after head  
replacement) operations  
Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 15 (dot count small suction)  
operations  
Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 16 (sedimented ink agitation)  
operations  
CLN-A-17  
CLN-A-TTL  
CLN-M-1  
CLN-M-4  
Cumulative number of automatic cleaning 17 (small suction) operations  
Total number of automatic cleaning operations  
Times  
Times  
Times  
Cumulative number of manual cleaning 1 (normal suction) operations  
Cumulative number of manual cleaning 4 (ink draining from head after head Times  
replacement) operations  
CLN-M-5  
Cumulative number of manual cleaning 5 (ink draining from head and tube  
before transportation ) operations  
Times  
CLN-M-6  
Cumulative number of manual cleaning 6 (normal strong suction) operations Times  
CLN-M-TTL  
Total number of manual cleaning operations  
Times  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
4) CLEAR: Counters related to counter initialization  
T-7-17  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
Times  
CLR-INK CONSUME  
CLR-CUTTER EXC.  
CLR-MTC EXC.  
Cumulative count of ink section consumption amount clearing  
Cumulative count of cutter replacement count clearing  
Times  
Times  
Cumulative count of maintenance cartridge replacement count  
clearing  
CLR-HEAD EXC.  
CLR-UNIT A EXC.  
Cumulative count of printhead replacement count clearing  
Times  
Times  
Cumulative count of unit A(waste ink system) replacement count  
clearing  
CLR-UNIT D EXC.  
CLR-UNIT F EXC.  
Cumulative count of unit D(carriage unit) replacement count clearing Times  
Cumulative count of unit F(ink supply system) replacement count  
clearing  
Times  
CLR-UNIT H EXC.  
CLR-UNIT K EXC.  
Cumulative count of unit H(purge) replacement count clearing  
Times  
Cumulative count of unit K(head management sensor) replacement Times  
count clearing  
CLR-UNIT M EXC.  
Cumulative count of unit M(carriage motor) replacement count  
clearing  
Times  
CLR-FACTORY CNT.  
For factory  
Times  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
5) EXCHANGE: Counters related to parts replacement  
T-7-18  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
CUTTER EXC.  
Cutter replacement count  
Times  
(Count of executing cutter replacement mode)  
Maintenance cartridge replacement count  
Printhead replacement count  
MTC EXC.  
Times  
Times  
Times  
Times  
HEAD EXC.  
BOARD EXC.(M/B)  
UNIT A EXC.  
Main controller PCB replacement count  
Unit A (waste ink system) replacement count  
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS  
A])  
UNIT D EXC.  
UNIT F EXC.  
UNIT H EXC.  
UNIT K EXC.  
UNIT M EXC.  
Unit D (carriage unit) replacement count  
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS  
D])  
Times  
Times  
Times  
Times  
Times  
Unit F (ink supply system) replacement count  
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS  
F])  
Unit H (purge unit) replacement count  
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS  
H])  
Unit K (head management sensor) replacement count  
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS  
K])  
Unit M (carriage unit) replacement count  
(Count of executing [INITIALIZE] > [PARTS COUNTER] > [PARTS  
M])  
6) DETAIL-CNT: Other counters  
T-7-19  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
MOVE PRINTER  
N-INKCHK(XX)  
Count of [Move Printer] operations  
Times  
Times  
XX: Ink color  
Count of turning off the ink remaining level detection for each color  
MEDIACONFIG-CNT Count of media registered by media editor  
Times  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
7) INK-USE1: Counters related to ink consumption  
T-7-20  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
INK-USE1(XX)  
XX: Ink color  
ml  
Cumulative consumption amount of generic ink  
INK-USE1(TTL)  
N-INK-USE1(XX)  
Total amount of the cumulative consumption of generic ink  
ml  
ml  
XX: Ink color  
Cumulative consumption amount of refilled ink  
N-INK-USE1(TTL) Total amount of the cumulative consumption of refilled ink  
ml  
8) INK-USE2: Counters related to ink consumption  
T-7-21  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
INK-USE2(XX)  
XX: Ink color  
ml  
Consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink tank.  
INK-USE2(TTL)  
N-INK-USE2(XX)  
Total consumption amount of generic ink of the currently installed ink  
tanks  
ml  
ml  
ml  
XX: Ink color  
Consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink tank  
N-INK-USE2(TTL) Total consumption amount of refilled ink of the currently installed ink  
tanks  
9) INK-EXC: Counters related to ink tank replacement  
T-7-22  
Uni  
t
Display  
Description  
INK-EXC(XX)  
XX: Ink color  
ml  
Cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement  
INK-EXC(TTL)  
Total amount of tho cumulative count of generic ink tank replacement  
ml  
ml  
N-INK-EXC(XX) XX: Ink color  
Cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement  
N-INK-EXC(TTL) Total amount of tho cumulative count of refilled ink tank replacement  
ml  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
10) MEDIA x (x: 1 to 7): Counters related to media  
One to seven media types are displayed individually in order with large cumulative print area.  
T-7-23  
Display  
NAME  
Description  
Unit  
-
Media type  
TTL  
Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric)  
Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch)  
Cumulative print area of roll media (metric)  
m2  
Sq.f  
m2  
Sq.f  
m2  
Sq.f  
TTL  
ROLL  
ROLL  
Cumulative print area of roll media (inch)  
CUT SHEET  
CUT SHEET  
Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric)  
Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch)  
11) MEDIA OTHER: Counters related to media  
Displays the total amount of cumulative print area of the other media type than the above-mentioned  
T-7-24  
Display  
NAME  
Description  
Unit  
-
Media type  
TTL  
Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (metric)  
Total amount of cumulative print area of roll media and cut sheet (inch)  
Cumulative print area of roll media (metric)  
m2  
Sq.f  
m2  
Sq.f  
m2  
Sq.f  
TTL  
ROLL  
ROLL  
Cumulative print area of roll media (inch)  
CUT SHEET  
CUT SHEET  
Cumulative print area of cut sheet (metric)  
Cumulative print area of cut sheet (inch)  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
12) MEDIASIZE1 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing  
T-7-25  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
P-SQ 36-44  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than m2/Sq.f  
44 inches (physical size)  
P-SQ 24-36  
P-SQ 17-24  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than m2/Sq.f  
36 inches (physical size)  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than m2/Sq.f  
24 inches (physical size)  
P-SQ -17  
Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size)  
m2/Sq.f  
P-CNT 36-44  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than sheets  
36 inches but less than 44 inches (physical size)  
P-CNT 24-36  
P-CNT 17-24  
P-CNT -17  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than sheets  
24 inches but less than 36 inches (physical size)  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than sheets  
17 inches but less than 24 inches (physical size)  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches  
(physical size)  
sheets  
13) MEDIASIZE2 ROLL: Counters related to roll media printing  
T-7-26  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
D-SQ 36-44  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than m2/Sq.f  
44 inches (data size)  
D-SQ 24-36  
D-SQ 17-24  
D-SQ -17  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than m2/Sq.f  
36 inches (data size)  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than m2/Sq.f  
24 inches (data size)  
Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size)  
m2/Sq.f  
D-CNT 36-44 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 sheets  
inches but less than 44 inches (data size)  
D-CNT 24-36 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 sheets  
inches but less than 36 inches (data size)  
D-CNT 17-24 Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 17 sheets  
inches but less than 24 inches (data size)  
D-CNT -17  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data sheets  
size)  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
14) MEDIASIZE1 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing  
T-7-27  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
P-SQ 36-44  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than m2/Sq.f  
44 inches (physical size)  
P-SQ 24-36  
P-SQ 17-24  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than m2/Sq.f  
36 inches (physical size)  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than m2/Sq.f  
24 inches (physical size)  
P-SQ -17  
Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (physical size)  
m2/Sq.f  
P-CNT 36-44  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than sheets  
36 inches but less than 44 inches (physical size)  
P-CNT 24-36  
P-CNT 17-24  
P-CNT -17  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than sheets  
24 inches but less than 36 inches (physical size)  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than sheets  
17 inches but less than 24 inches (physical size)  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches  
(physical size)  
sheets  
15) MEDIASIZE2 CUT: Counters related to cut sheet printing  
T-7-28  
Display  
Description  
Unit  
D-SQ 36-44  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 36 inches but less than 44 m2/Sq.f  
inches (data size)  
D-SQ 24-36  
D-SQ 17-24  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 24 inches but less than 36 m2/Sq.f  
inches (data size)  
Cumulative print area of paper equal to or larger than 17 inches but less than 24 m2/Sq.f  
inches (data size)  
D-SQ -17  
Cumulative print area of paper less than 17 inches (data size)  
m2/Sq.f  
D-CNT 36-44  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 36 sheets  
inches but less than 44 inches (data size)  
D-CNT 24-36  
D-CNT 17-24  
D-CNT -17  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 24 sheets  
inches but less than 36 inches (data size)  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper equal to or larger than 17 sheets  
inches but less than 24 inches (data size)  
Cumulative number of sheets of A4-equivalent paper less than 17 inches (data sheets  
size)  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
16) HEAD DOT CNT.1: Counter related to dot count  
T-7-29  
Display  
XX  
Description  
Unit  
XX: Ink color  
Dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead  
Total dot counts of each colors of the currently installed printhead (x 1,000,000) dots  
(x 1,000,000) dots  
TTL  
17) HEAD DOT CNT.2: Counter related to dot count  
T-7-30  
Display  
XX  
Description  
Unit  
XX: Ink color  
(x 1,000,000) dots  
Cumulative dot counts of each colors  
TTL  
Total cumulative dot counts of each colors  
(x 1,000,000) dots  
18) PARTS CNT. : Counter related to consumable parts  
T-7-31  
Display  
Description  
x: Unit number of consumable parts  
Unit  
COUNTER  
x
Day(s)  
(For detail, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable  
Parts")  
Display the status and the days passed since the counter resetting.  
- Status  
OK: Use rate (until part replacement) of all consumable parts included  
in each unit are below 90%.  
W1: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts  
included in each unit has reached 90% or more.  
W2: Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts  
included in each unit has reached 100%, but no need to stop the printer.  
E : Use rate (until part replacement) of either of the consumable parts  
included in each unit has reached 100%, and the printer needs to be  
stopped.  
PARTS yy 1: yy: Unit number of consumable parts  
(For detail, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable  
Parts")  
Counter of the consumable part (current)  
2: Life of the consumable part  
3: Use rate until part replacement  
%
4: Counter of the consumable part (accumulate)  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
f) SETTING  
Make various settings.  
1) Pth  
Turn on or off the head pulse rank control function.  
Default: OFF  
2) RTC  
Set RTC (real time clock) after replacing the lithium battery on the main controller PCB.  
T-7-32  
Display  
Description  
DATE  
TIME  
yyyy/mm/dd  
hh:mm  
Set date  
Set time  
3) PV AUTO JUDGE  
Sets ink saver mode.  
Default: OFF  
g) INITIALIZE  
Clear the [DISPLAY] histories, [ADJUST] settings, [COUNTER] values, and other parameters.  
T-7-33  
Display  
WARNING  
Description  
Initialize the history of WARNING.  
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [WARNING] will be initialized.)  
ERROR  
Initialize the history of ERROR.  
(All displayed contents of [DISPLAY] > [ERROR] will be initialized.)  
ADJUST  
W-INK  
Initialize the value of band adjustment (by user) and head adjustment.  
The automatically adjusted value will not be initialized.  
Initialize the remaining capacity (%) of the maitenance cartridge.  
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PRINTER] > [W-INK])  
PURGE  
Initialize the counter related to purge unit.  
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PURGE])  
INK-USE CNT  
Initialize the consumption amount of ink.  
(Clear [COUNTER] > [INK-USE2], and count up [COUNTER] > [CLEAR] > [CLR-  
INK CONSUME])  
CUTTER-CHG CNT Initialize the cutter unit replacement frequency.  
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [CUTTER EXC.], and count up [COUNTER]  
> [CLEAR] > [CLR-CUTTER EXC.])  
W-INK-CHG CNT  
HEAD-CHG CNT  
Initialize the maintenance cartridge replacement frequency.  
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [MTC EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] >  
[CLEAR] > [CLR-MTC EXC.])  
Initialize the printhead replacement frequency.  
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [HEAD EXC.], and count up [COUNTER] >  
[CLEAR] > [CLR-HEAD EXC.])  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Display  
Description  
PARTS-  
PARTS xx: Unit number of consumable parts  
CHG CNT xx  
(For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")  
Initialize the consumable part replacement frequency.  
(Clear [COUNTER] > [EXCHANGE] > [UNIT x EXC], and count up [COUNTER] >  
[CLEAR] > [CLR-UNIT x EXC.])  
PARTS  
PARTS xx: Unit number of consumable parts  
COUNTER xx  
(For details, refer to "Maintenance and Inspection" > "Consumable Parts")  
Initialize the counter amount of the consumable parts.  
(Clear [COUNTER] > [PARTS CNT.] > [PARTS x])  
* After replacing the consumable part, be sure to execute this menu.  
7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
7.1.4 Sample Printout  
0017-5665  
a) PRINTINF  
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE] > [DISPLAY] > [PRINTINF] is shown  
below, along with instructions about how to interpret it.  
xxxx PRINT INF  
(1)  
(2)  
Firm:00.49 Boot:00.31 MIT(DBF):9303 MIT(DB):1.02 S/N:DF029090  
SYSTEM  
TYPE:DF029090 24 0 TMP:26 SIZE_LF: 0.0 SIZE_CR: 514.3  
HEAD S/N:39410000  
HEAD LOT:166L09A0  
INK  
C
:0  
M
:0  
Y
:0 MBK :0MBK2 :0 BK :0  
WARNING  
01:0000  
06:0000  
11:0000  
16:0000  
ERROR  
02:0000  
07:0000  
12:0000  
17:0000  
03:0000  
08:0000  
13:0000  
18:0000  
04:0000  
09:0000  
14:0000  
19:0000  
05:0000  
10:0000  
15:0000  
20:0000  
01:03060A00-2E01  
02:0000  
08:0000  
13:0000  
18:0000  
03:0000  
09:0000  
14:0000  
19:0000  
04:0000  
10:0000  
15:0000  
20:0000  
05:0000  
06:0000  
11:0000  
16:0000  
07:0000  
12:0000  
17:0000  
INK CHK: C:0 M:0 Y:0 MBK:0 MBK2:0 BK:0  
(3)  
COUNTER  
PRINTER  
LIFE TTL:0  
LIFE ROLL:0 LIFE CUTSHEET:0 LIFE CASSETTE:0  
LIFE A:0 B:0 C:0 D:0 E:0 F:0  
MEDIA 7  
NAME  
MEDIA OTHER  
NAME  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
OTHER  
0.0 m2  
0.0 m2  
TTL  
0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f  
TTL  
0.0 sq.f  
0.0 sq.f  
0.0 sq.f  
0.0 sq.f  
ROLL  
CUTSHEET  
CASSETTE  
0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f  
0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f  
0.0 m2 0.0 sq.f  
ROLL  
CUTSHEET : 0.0 m2  
CASSETTE  
:
0.0 m2  
(a) (b) (c)  
(d)  
(e)  
(f)  
PARTS COUNTER  
COUNTER A : OK  
36  
36  
36  
PARTS A1  
:
0.0  
0.0  
36.1 0%  
64.0 0%  
0.0  
0.0  
COUNTER B : OK  
PARTS B1  
:
COUNTER D : OK  
PARTS D1  
1362  
377  
2238  
13028571 0%  
6700000 0%  
16500000 0%  
60000 0%  
1362  
377  
2238  
33  
PARTS D2  
PARTS D3  
PARTS D4  
COUNTER F  
PARTS F1  
:
:
:
:
:
33  
36  
OK  
377  
4000000 0%  
50000 0%  
12500 0%  
750 0%  
377  
15  
4
COUNTER H : OK  
36  
15  
36  
PARTS H1  
COUNTER L  
PARTS L1  
:
:
:
OK  
4
0
COUNTER P : OK  
PARTS P1  
COUNTER Q : OK  
PARTS Q1  
COUNTER R : OK  
PARTS R1  
COUNTER V : OK  
PARTS V1  
36  
36  
36  
36  
:
0
:
0
750 0%  
0
:
0
27500 0%  
15.2 0%  
0
:
0.0  
0.0  
(4)  
PV AUTO JUDGE : ON(NORMAL) , 1  
(a)  
(b)  
F-7-1  
7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7  
(1) Version numbers of the firmware installed in the printer, boot ROM, and MIT DB format  
(2) Printer information  
For more item details, see "Detail of Service Mode" > "a) Display".  
(3) Counter information  
For more item details, see "Detail of Service Mode" > "e) Counter".  
(a) Consumables status  
(b) Number of days elapsed since the counter was last reset  
(c) Counter value  
(d) Value with which consumables reach their replacement timing  
(e) Ratio of the current count to the replacement timing  
(f) Cumulative counter value  
(4) Ink saver mode setting  
(a) Ink saver mode status  
(b) Number of times ink save mode has been executed (unit: times).  
b) NOZZLE 1  
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [PRINT PATTERN]>  
[NOZZLE 1] is shown below.  
Nozzle Check Pattern SERVICE  
F-7-2  
7-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
c) NOZZLE 2/NOZZLE 3  
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [PRINT PATTERN]>  
[NOZZLE 2] or [NOZZLE 3]is shown below.  
F-7-3  
d) OPTICAL AXIS  
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [PRINT PATTERN]>  
[OPTICAL AXIS] is shown below.  
F-7-4  
7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
e) DETAIL  
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [HEAD ADJ.] > [AUTO  
HEAD ADJ]> [DETAIL] is shown below.  
Printhead Adjustment Pattern  
A-1  
A-3  
A-5  
A-7  
A-9  
A-11  
B-1  
B-2  
B-3  
B-4  
B-5  
B-6  
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
A-2  
A-4  
A-6  
A-8  
A-10  
A-12  
C-1  
C-2  
C-3  
C-4  
C-5  
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
10  
12  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
10  
12  
14  
16  
10  
12  
14  
10  
12  
14  
16  
10  
12  
14  
10  
12  
10  
12  
10  
12  
8
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
14  
16  
18  
20  
14  
16  
18  
20  
14  
16  
18  
20  
Canon imagePROGRAF iPF600  
D-1 D-2 D-3  
Printhead Adjustment Pattern  
D-4  
D-5  
D-6  
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
D-7  
D-8  
D-9  
D-10  
D-11  
D-12  
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
E-1  
E-2  
E-3  
E-4  
E-5  
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
F-1  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
F-7-5  
7-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
f) BASIC  
A sample printout that is produced by executing [SERVICE MODE]> [ADJUST]> [HEAD ADJ.] > [AUTO  
HEAD ADJ]> [BASIC] is shown below.  
Printhead Adjustment Pattern  
D-1  
D-2  
D-3  
D-4  
D-5  
D-6  
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
D-7  
D-8  
D-9  
D-10  
D-11  
D-12  
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
F-7-6  
7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
7.2 Special Mode  
7.2.1 Special Modes for Servicing  
0014-3355  
This printer supports the following special modes in addition to the service mode:  
- PCB replacement mode  
- Download mode  
- Counter display mode  
1. PCB replacement mode  
This mode is used when replacing the main PCB or MC relay PCB.  
By executing this mode,  
- Backup data of the settings and counter values stored in the MC relay PCB are moved to the new main PCB.  
- The data such as the settings and counter values are copied to the MC relay PCB.  
a) Entering the PCB replacement mode  
Follow the same procedure as that for entering the service mode.  
(With the "Paper Source" button and "Information" button pressed down, turn on the "Power" button.)  
When the printer starts up, compare the serial number memorized in the main PCB's EEPROM with that  
memorized in the MC relay PCB's EEPROM. If they do not match, or no serial number is memorized in either  
EEPROM, enter the PCB replacement mode.  
While you are in the PCB replacement mode, the MESSAGE LED, roll media LED, and ONLINE LED are lit.  
b) Procedure  
Select "CPU BOARD" or "MC BOARD" using the [  
to determine it.  
] and [  
] buttons, and then press the [OK] button  
- CPU BOARD  
Select this after replacing the main PCB.  
The data in the MC relay PCB is copied to the main PCB.  
- MC BOARD  
Select this before replacing the main PCB.  
The data in the main PCB is copied to the MC relay PCB.  
Use this when the MC relay PCB is a new one.  
c) Exiting the PCB replacement mode  
Turning off the Power button of the printer allows you to exit the PCB replacement mode.  
For details on how to replace the PCB, see Parts Replacement Procedure > Disassembly/Reassembly > Points  
to Note on Disassembly and Reassembly > Boards.  
2. Download mode  
Use this mode only when updating the firmware without performing initialization.  
a) Entering the download mode  
1) Turning off the Power button of the printer.  
2) With the "Stop" and "Information" buttons pressed down, turn on the Power button of the printer.  
* Keep pressing the above buttons until "Initializing" appears on the display.  
7-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7  
b) Procedure  
When "Download Mode/Send Firmware" is shown on the display, transfer the firmware.  
When downloading of the firmware is completed, the printer is turned off automatically.  
3. Counter display mode  
Use this mode to view only printer counter information.  
a) Invoking counter display mode  
1) Press the [MENU] button to keep [Information] > [System Info] selected.  
2) Press the [ ] button whole holding down the [MENU] button + [OK] button to invoke counter display  
mode.  
b) How to view counter display mode  
- S/N: Unit serial number  
- CNT: Number of copies printed in A4 terms (unit: copies)  
7-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8 ERROR CODE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
Contents  
8.1 Outline................................................................................................................. 8-1  
8.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................... 8-1  
8.2 Warning Table ................................................................................................... 8-2  
8.2.1 Warnings ..................................................................................................................... 8-2  
8.3 Error Table ......................................................................................................... 8-3  
8.3.1 Error Code List ........................................................................................................... 8-3  
8.4 Sevice Call Table .............................................................................................. 8-6  
8.4.1 Service call errors ...................................................................................................... 8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
8.1 Outline  
8.1.1 Outline  
0014-1949  
The printer indicates errors using the display and LEDs.  
If an error occurs during printing, the printer status is also displayed on the status monitor of the printer driver.  
The following three types of errors are displayed on the display:  
- Warning  
Status where the print operation can be continued without remedying the cause of the problem. This can,  
however, adversely affect the printing results.  
- Error  
Status where the print operation is stopped, and the regular operation cannot be recovered until the cause of the  
problem is remedied.  
- Service call error  
When a service call error occurs, the error is not cleared and the error indication remains on the operation panel  
even if the printer is powered off and on again. (Occurrence of the service call error is indicated again at power-  
on.)  
This measure is taken to prevent user's recovery of the service call error and damages to the printer.  
Service call errors can be cleared, however, by starting up the printer in the service mode.  
For how to take actions against warnings and errors, refer to "Troubleshooting".  
Overview of warnings and error codes  
T-8-1  
Code*  
Diagnosis  
W100x  
Ink warning  
W110x  
Waste ink warning  
GARO warning  
W12xx  
03xxxxxx-20xx  
03xxxxxx-2Exx  
03xxxxxx-25xx  
03xxxxxx-280x  
03xxxxxx-281x  
03xxxxxx-282x  
03xxxxxx-2Fxx  
Exxx-40xx  
Media feeding error  
Data mismatch error  
Ink error  
Printhead error  
Maintenance cartridge error  
Adjustment error  
Other errors  
Service call error  
* "x" stands for a numeric or letter.  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 8  
8.2 Warning Table  
8.2.1 Warnings  
0014-1952  
The codes correspond to the numbers shown on the DIPLAY in the service mode.  
T-8-2  
Code Display massage  
Status  
1000  
1001  
1002  
1003  
1006  
1007  
100F  
1010  
1100  
1221  
1222  
Ink Lv1: Chk  
BK ink tank is almost empty  
Y ink tank is almost empty  
M ink tank is almost empty  
C ink tank is almost empty  
MBK ink tank is almost empty  
MBK2 ink tank is almost empty  
Force feed limit  
Ink Lv1: Chk  
Ink Lv1: Chk  
Ink Lv1: Chk  
Ink Lv1: Chk  
Ink Lv1: Chk  
Feed Limit...  
Check printed document.  
Check maint cartridge capacity.  
GARO W1221  
GARO W1222  
Ink non discharging  
Maintenance cartridge is almost full  
Unsupported command in GARO image mode  
Invalid number of parameters in GARO image mode (no  
parameter)  
1223  
1225  
1231  
1232  
1233  
1234  
1235  
GARO W1223  
GARO W1225  
GARO W1231  
GARO W1232  
GARO W1233  
GARO W1234  
GARO W1235  
Required item was omitted in GARO image mode  
Other warning in GARO image mode  
Unsupported command in GARO setting mode  
Invalid number of parameters in GARO setting mode  
Reauired item was omitted in GARO setting mode  
Data out of range in GARO image mode  
Other warning in GARO setting mode  
Prepare for parts replacement. Call for Parts counter warning level 1  
service.  
Parts replacement time has passed.  
Call for service.  
Parts counter warning level 2  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 8  
8.3 Error Table  
8.3.1 Error Code List  
0014-1956  
The codes correspond to the numbers shown on the DISPLAY in the service mode.  
T-8-3  
Code*  
Description  
03010000-200C  
03010000-200D  
03010000-200E  
03010000-200F  
03010000-2016  
03010000-2017  
03010000-2018  
03010000-2820  
03010000-2821  
03010000-2822  
03010000-2823  
03010000-2E1F  
03010000-2E27  
03010000-2F33  
03016000-2010  
03016000-2010  
03030000-2E21  
03031000-2E0F  
03031000-2E11  
03031000-2E12  
03060000-2E14  
03060A00-2E00  
03060A00-2E1B  
03061000-2E15  
03130031-260E  
03130031-260F  
03130031-2618  
03130031-2F13  
03130031-2F14  
03130031-2F16  
03130031-2F17  
03130031-2F1F  
03130031-2F20  
03130031-2F22  
03130031-2F23  
Media leading edge not detected  
The trailing edge of cut sheet cannot be detected  
Too small media  
Too large media  
Paper came off at paper feed.  
Media right edge not detected  
Media left edge not detected  
Head registration in proper adjustment  
LF adjustment error  
Eccentricity improper adjustment  
Printhead check error  
Media is too small to print adjustment pattern  
Media became misaligned during printing  
Transparent media was loaded and cannot adjust  
Skewed media  
Skewed media  
IEEE1394 error  
Upper cover error  
Printhead fixer cover error  
Release lever error  
Width indicated by received data does not match width of paper  
Roll media was loaded even though the received data indicated roll media.  
End of roll media  
Media type indicated by data does not match  
Gap detection error  
Standard side seat error(not generated in the user mode.)  
VH voltage error  
A/D converter outside trigger output stop  
ASIC register writing error  
Mist fan error  
Platen fan error  
Purge motor HP error  
Purge motor error  
Pump movement timeout  
Pump cannot operate  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 8  
Code*  
Description  
03130031-2F25  
03130031-2F26  
03130031-2F27  
03130031-2F2A  
03130031-2F2D  
03130031-2F2E  
03130031-2F32  
03130031-2F3A  
03130031-4027  
03800200-2802  
03800200-2811  
03800300-2801  
03800400-2803  
03800500-280C  
03800500-2F2F  
03800500-2F30  
03810101-2501  
03810102-2502  
03810103-2503  
03810104-2500  
03810106-2506  
03810106-2507  
03810201-2581  
03810201-2591  
03810202-2582  
03810202-2592  
03810203-2583  
03810203-2593  
03810204-2580  
03810204-2590  
03810206-2586  
03810206-2587  
03810206-2596  
03810206-2597  
03830101-2521  
03830102-2522  
03830103-2523  
03830104-2520  
03830106-2526  
03830106-2527  
03830201-2541  
Unable to detect CR motor HP  
Carriage cannot operate  
Carriage movement timeout  
Feed roller HP sensor error  
Pump error  
Roll movement timeout  
Multi sensor faulty  
Valve motor error  
Lift movement time-out  
Incorrect printhead was installed  
Difference of version of print head  
Unable to correct printhead DI  
Printhead EEPROM error  
Many nozzle on printhead did not inject ink  
No ink ejection detection error  
No ink ejection detection position adjustment error  
No ink (Y)  
No ink (M)  
No ink (C)  
No ink (BK)  
No ink (MBK)  
No ink (MBK2)  
Remaining ink low (Y)  
Remaining ink low (Y)  
Remaining ink low (M)  
Remaining ink low (M)  
Remaining ink low (C)  
Remaining ink low (C)  
Remaining ink low (BK)  
Remaining ink low (BK)  
Remaining ink low (MBK)  
Remaining ink low (MBK2)  
Remaining ink low (MBK)  
Remaining ink low (MBK2)  
Ink tank not installed (Y)  
Ink tank not installed (M)  
Ink tank not installed (C)  
Ink tank not installed (BK)  
Ink tank not Installed (MBK)  
Ink tank not installed (MBK2)  
Ink tank ID error (Y)  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Code*  
Description  
03830202-2542  
03830203-2543  
03830204-2540  
03830206-2546  
03830206-2547  
03830301-2561  
03830302-2562  
03830303-2563  
03830303-2572  
03830304-2560  
03830304-2570  
03830306-2566  
03830306-2567  
03830306-2576  
03830306-2577  
03830312-2571  
03830313-2573  
03841001-2819  
03841001-281B  
03841101-2818  
03841201-2816  
03841201-2817  
03860002-2E02  
03860002-2E0A  
Ink tank ID error (M)  
Ink tank ID error (C)  
Ink tank ID error (BK)  
Ink tank ID error (MBK)  
Ink tank ID error (MBK2)  
Ink tank EEPROM error (Y)  
Ink tank EEPROM error (M)  
Ink tank EEPROM error (C)  
Remaining ink low (M)  
Ink tank EEPROM error (BK)  
Remaining ink low (BK)  
Ink tank EEPROM error (MBK)  
Ink tank EEPROM error (MBK2)  
Remaining ink low (MBK)  
Remaining ink low (MBK2)  
Remaining ink low (Y)  
Remaining ink low (C)  
Maintenance cartridge tank full  
Empty capacity of the maintenance cartridge when cleaning it various is insufficient.  
Maintenance cartridge not installed  
Maintenance cartridge EEPROM error  
Maintenance cartridge ID error  
The cut sheet is not set though the data of the cut sheet specification was received.  
Manually fed cut sheet was already loaded even though received data indicated roll  
media  
03860002-2E0C  
03861001-2405  
03861001-2406  
03862000-2E09  
03870001-2015  
03900001-4042  
03900001-4049  
E194-4034  
When the roll paper was loaded, the data of the cut sheet specification was received.  
The form set position is unsuitable to the print of edge none.  
Data is unsuitable to the print of edge none.  
Roll paper running out  
Cutting failure  
MIT data transfer failure  
Forwarding ROM data machine kind difference  
Sensor calibration error(not generated in the use mode.)  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
8.4 Sevice Call Table  
8.4.1 Service call errors  
0013-7771  
*Codes correspond to the numbers shown on the DIPLAY in the service mode.  
T-8-4  
Code*  
Description  
Display message  
ERROR Exxx-xxxx  
Call For Service  
E141-4046  
E144-4047  
E146-4001  
E161-403E  
Recovery system rotation court reached 50,000.  
Feed system counting error  
Borderless/idle ejection/mist recovery count full  
Abnormally high printhead temperature  
E194-404A No ink ejection counting error  
E196-4040  
E196-4041  
E196-4042  
E196-4043  
E196-4044  
E196-4045  
Checksum error  
Flash memory clearing error  
Flash memory write error  
Main controller error  
EEPROM size error  
EEPROM write error  
E198-401C RTC error  
E198-401D RTC low battery error  
E198-401E  
RTC clock stopped  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
APPENDIX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 General Circuit Diagram  
General Circuit Diagram (1/4)  
Carriage relay PCB (1/2)  
Main controller PCB (1/3)  
Power  
supply PCB  
Operation  
panel PCB  
Upper cover lock Upper cover lock Upper cover lock Upper cover lock  
solenoid (L)  
switch (L)  
switch (R)  
solenoid (R)  
F-1-1  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Circuit Diagram (2/4)  
Main controller PCB (2/3)  
C L  
Pump  
encoder  
sensor  
C L 1  
Feed roller  
encoder  
sensor  
Roll media  
rewinding clutch  
Pump cam  
sensor  
Media  
sensor  
Lift cam  
sensor  
Purge  
motor  
Feed motor  
Feed roller  
HP sensor  
Suction fan  
Mist fan (R)  
Mist fan (L)  
Lift motor  
Carriage motor  
Pressure  
release switch  
F-1-2  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Circuit Diagram (3/4)  
Main controller PCB (3/3)  
Maintenance  
cartridge  
relay PCB  
Temperature/  
humidity  
Head  
management  
sensor  
Ink tank  
ROM PCB (L)  
Ink tank  
ROM PCB (R)  
Valve open/  
closed  
detection  
sensor  
detection  
sensor  
Ink tank  
cover switch  
Maintenance  
cartridge  
ROM PCB  
Valve motor  
Ink detection sensor  
Ink detection sensor  
Ink tank (L) Ink tank (R)  
F-1-3  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Circuit Diagram (4/4)  
Multi sensor  
Printhead  
Head relay PCB  
Carriage relay PCB (2/2)  
Linear  
encoder  
sensor  
Carriage cover  
sensor  
F-1-4  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Black Box Computer Hardware EXN37215 User Manual
Black Decker Hot Beverage Maker KE2000 User Manual
Blomberg Clothes Dryer TKF 9431 A User Manual
Boss Audio Systems Car Stereo System BV8966B User Manual
Bowers Wilkins Headphones C5 User Manual
Briggs Stratton Switch 71008 User Manual
Brother Network Card 1800 User Manual
Cabletron Systems Network Card SSIM T5 04 User Manual
Cabletron Systems Switch 7C04 Workgroup User Manual
Cateye Cyclometer OS 10 User Manual